Roland Musical Instrument PCR 30 User Guide
O w n e r’s Ma n u a l  
Be d ie n u n g sa n le itu n g  
Mo d e d ’e m p lo i  
Ma n u a le d ’u so  
Ma n u a l d e l u su a rio  
Thank you for purchasing the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 USB MIDI controller.  
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “USING THE  
UNIT SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (pp. 2–4). These sections  
provide important information concerning the proper operation of the  
unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good  
grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual  
should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on  
hand as a convenient reference.  
Copyright © 2003 ROLAND CORPORATION  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in  
any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USIN G THE UN IT SAFELY  
The  
symbol alerts the user to important instructions  
Used for instructions intended to alert  
the user to the risk of death or severe  
injury should the unit be used  
improperly.  
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is  
determined by the design contained within the  
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for  
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.  
Used for instructions intended to alert  
the user to the risk of injury or material  
damage should the unit be used  
improperly.  
The  
symbol alerts the user to items that must never  
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that  
must not be done is indicated by the design contained  
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it  
means that the unit must never be disassembled.  
* Material damage refers to damage or  
other adverse effects caused with  
respect to the home and all its  
furnishings, as well to domestic  
animals or pets.  
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be  
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is  
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In  
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-  
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.  
•
001 Before using this unit, make sure to read the  
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.  
................................................................................................  
•
008cBe sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied  
with the unit. Also, make sure the line  
voltage at the installation matches the input  
voltage specified on the AC adaptor’s body.  
Other AC adaptors may use a different  
polarity, or be designed for a different  
voltage, so their use could result in damage,  
malfunction, or electric shock.  
•
002cDo not open (or modify in any way) the unit  
or its AC adaptor.  
................................................................................................  
•
003 Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace  
parts within it (except when this manual  
provides specific instructions directing you  
to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer,  
the nearest EDIROL/ Roland Service Center,  
or an authorized EDIROL/ Roland  
................................................................................................  
•
009 Do not excessively twist or bend the power  
cord, nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so  
can damage the cord, producing severed  
elements and short circuits. Damaged cords  
are fire and shock hazards!  
distributor, as listed on the "Information" page.  
................................................................................................  
................................................................................................  
•
004 Never use or store the unit in places that are:  
•
011 Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable  
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g.,  
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near  
a heating duct, on top of heat-generating  
equipment); or are  
material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind  
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.  
................................................................................................  
•
012cImmediately turn the power off, remove the  
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet  
floors); or are  
AC adaptor from the outlet, and request  
servicing by your retailer, the nearest  
EDIROL/ Roland Service Center, or an authorized  
EDIROL/ Roland distributor, as listed on the “Infor-  
mation” page when:  
• Humid; or are  
• Exposed to rain; or are  
• Dusty; or are  
• Subject to high levels of vibration.  
• The AC adaptor or the power-supply cord has  
been damaged; or  
................................................................................................  
•
007 Make sure you always have the unit placed  
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs  
so it is level and sure to remain stable. Never  
place it on stands that could wobble, or on  
inclined surfaces.  
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been  
spilled onto the unit; or  
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise  
has become wet); or  
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or  
exhibits a marked change in performance.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101b  
•
013 In households with small children, an adult  
•
The unit and the AC adaptor should be  
should provide supervision until the child is  
capable of following all the rules essential for  
the safe operation of the unit.  
located so their location or position does not  
interfere with their proper ventilation.  
................................................................................................  
102d  
................................................................................................  
•
Always grasp only the output plug or the  
body of the AC adaptor when plugging into,  
or unplugging from, this unit or an outlet.  
•
014 Protect the unit from strong impact.  
(Do not drop it!)  
................................................................................................  
................................................................................................  
103b  
•
015 Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to  
•
At regular intervals, you should unplug the  
AC adaptor and clean it by usinga dry cloth  
to wipe all dust and other accumulations  
away from its prongs.Also, disconnect the  
power plug from the power outlet whenever  
the unit isto remain unused for an extended  
period of time. Any accumulation of dustbe-  
tween the power plug and the power outlet can  
result in poor insulationand lead to fire.  
share an outlet with an unreasonable number  
of other devices. Be especially careful when  
using extension cords—the total power used  
by all devices you have connected to the  
extension cord’s outlet must never exceed the  
power rating (watts/ amperes) for the  
extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the  
insulation on the cord to heat up and  
................................................................................................  
eventually melt through.  
................................................................................................  
•
104 Try to prevent cords and cables from  
becoming entangled. Also, all cords and  
cables should be placed so they are out of the  
reach of children.  
•
016 Before using the unit in a foreign country,  
consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland  
Service Center, or an authorized Roland  
distributor, as listed on the "Information"  
page.  
................................................................................................  
•
106 Never climb on top of, nor place heavy  
................................................................................................  
objects on the unit.  
................................................................................................  
•
023 DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conven-  
107d  
tional audio CD player. The resulting sound  
may be of a level that could cause permanent  
hearing loss. Damage to speakers or other  
system components may result.  
•
Never handle the AC adaptor body, or its  
output plugs, with wet hands when plugging  
into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this  
unit.  
................................................................................................  
................................................................................................  
108b  
•
Before moving the unit, disconnect the AC  
adaptor and all cords coming from external  
devices.  
................................................................................................  
109b  
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power  
and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet.  
................................................................................................  
110b  
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of  
lightning in your area, disconnect the AC  
adaptor from the outlet.  
................................................................................................  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IMPO RTAN T N O TES  
291a  
In addition to the items listed under “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on page 2 -3, please read and observe the  
following:  
Po w e r Su p p ly  
Ma in te n a n ce  
401a  
301  
•
Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with  
any device that will generate line noise (such as an  
electric motor or variable lighting system).  
•
For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry  
cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with  
water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impreg-  
nated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent. After-  
wards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a  
soft, dry cloth.  
302  
•
The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after  
long hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is  
not a cause for concern.  
307  
402  
•
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off  
the power to all units. This will help prevent  
malfunctions and/ or damage to speakers or other  
devices.  
•
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of  
any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration  
and/ or deformation.  
Ad d itio n a l Pre ca u tio n s  
Pla ce m e n t  
551  
•
Please be aware that the contents of memory can be  
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the  
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself  
against the risk of loosing important data, we  
352a  
•
This device may interfere with radio and television  
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of  
such receivers.  
recommend that you periodically save a backup  
copy of important data you have stored in the unit’s  
memory in another MIDI device (e.g., a sequencer).  
352b  
•
Noise may be produced if wireless communications  
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the  
vicinity of this unit. Such noise could occur when  
receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing.  
Should you experience such problems, you should  
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater  
distance from this unit, or switch them off.  
552  
•
Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the  
contents of data that was stored in another MIDI  
device (e.g., a sequencer) once it has been lost.  
Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning  
such loss of data.  
354a  
•
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it  
553  
near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an  
enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temper-  
ature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or  
discolor the unit.  
•
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the  
unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when  
using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can  
lead to malfunctions.  
355b  
556  
•
When moved from one location to another where  
•
When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp  
the connector itself—never pull on the cable. This  
way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the  
cable’s internal elements.  
the temperature and/ or humidity is very different,  
water droplets (condensation) may form inside the  
unit. Damage or malfunction may result if you  
attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore,  
before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for  
several hours, until the condensation has completely  
evaporated.  
558b  
•
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the  
unit’s volume at reasonable levels (especially when  
it is late at night).  
559a  
358  
•
When you need to transport the unit, package it in  
•
Do not allow objects to remain on top of the  
keyboard. This can be the cause of malfunction, such  
as keys ceasing to produce sound.  
the box (including padding) that it came in, if  
possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent  
packaging materials.  
Ha n d lin g CD-RO Ms  
561  
•
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5; sold  
separately). By connecting any other expression  
pedals, you risk causing malfunction and/ or  
damage to the unit.  
801  
•
Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside  
(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty  
CD-ROM discs may not be read properly. Keep  
your discs clean using a commercially available  
CD cleaner.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n te n ts  
Contents of the package...........................................................................9  
Names of things and what they do ........................................................10  
Se tu p ..................................................... 1 3  
English  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows) .......................................14  
Driver Installation ..............................................................................................................14  
Windows XP users....................................................................................................14  
Windows 2000 users .................................................................................................18  
Windows Me/ 98 users.............................................................................................21  
Settings ................................................................................................................................23  
MIDI input and output destinations......................................................................23  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh) .....................................25  
Mac OS 9/ 8 users...............................................................................................................25  
Installing the driver ..................................................................................................25  
Setting the driver.......................................................................................................26  
FreeMIDI settings......................................................................................................29  
Mac OS X Users ..................................................................................................................31  
Installing the driver ..................................................................................................31  
Setting the driver.......................................................................................................32  
Deutsch  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)............................33  
Treiberinstallation ..............................................................................................................33  
Windows XP-Anwender ..........................................................................................33  
Windows 2000-Anwender .......................................................................................38  
Windows Me/ 98-Anwender ...................................................................................42  
Einstellungen ......................................................................................................................44  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)..........................46  
Mac OS 9/ 8-Benutzer ........................................................................................................46  
Mac OS X-Benutzer............................................................................................................52  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Français  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows) ................................55  
Installation du pilote..........................................................................................................55  
Windows XP ..............................................................................................................55  
Windows 2000 ...........................................................................................................59  
Windows Me/ 98 .......................................................................................................62  
Paramètres...........................................................................................................................64  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh) ..............................66  
Utilisateurs Mac OS 9/ 8....................................................................................................66  
Utilisateurs Mac OS X........................................................................................................71  
Italiano  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)...........................74  
Installazione del driver .....................................................................................................74  
Utenti Windows XP ..................................................................................................74  
Utenti Windows 2000 ...............................................................................................78  
Utenti Windows Me/ 98...........................................................................................81  
Impostazioni .......................................................................................................................83  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh).........................85  
Utenti Mac OS 9/ 8 .............................................................................................................85  
Utenti Mac OS X.................................................................................................................91  
Español  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)......................94  
Instalación del controlador ...............................................................................................94  
Usuarios de Windows XP ........................................................................................94  
Usuarios de Windows 2000.....................................................................................98  
Usuarios de Windows Me/ 98...............................................................................101  
Configuración ...................................................................................................................103  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)..................105  
Usuarios de Mac OS 9/ 8.................................................................................................105  
Usuarios de Mac OS X.....................................................................................................110  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
O p e ra tio n ............................................ 1 1 3  
Connection and MIDI data flow ............................................................114  
When using MIDI connections.......................................................................................114  
When using a USB connection .......................................................................................115  
Basic operation......................................................................................116  
How to switch modes......................................................................................................116  
PLAY mode.......................................................................................................................117  
Controllers you can operate ..................................................................................117  
MIDI Channel mode (MIDI CH)....................................................................................118  
Program Change mode (PROGRAM CHANGE)........................................................119  
Bank mode (BANK).........................................................................................................120  
Memory mode (MEMORY)............................................................................................121  
Snapshot mode (SNAPSHOT) .......................................................................................122  
Panic mode (PANIC).......................................................................................................123  
Edit mode (EDIT)....................................................................................125  
Controller settings............................................................................................................126  
NOTE ASSIGN ........................................................................................................127  
AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN........................................................................................129  
CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN ............................................................................132  
PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN ...........................................................................135  
RPN/ NRPN ASSIGN .............................................................................................138  
SYS EX. ASSIGN .....................................................................................................140  
TEMPO ASSIGN .....................................................................................................146  
NO ASSIGN .............................................................................................................146  
ASSIGN COPY ........................................................................................................147  
SAVE..................................................................................................................................148  
OMNI.................................................................................................................................149  
PROTECT..........................................................................................................................150  
BULK..................................................................................................................................151  
Receive mode...........................................................................................................151  
Transmit mode ........................................................................................................153  
SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................154  
Setting method A ....................................................................................................155  
Setting method B.....................................................................................................155  
Setting method C.....................................................................................................155  
Setting method D ....................................................................................................156  
Setting method E.....................................................................................................156  
Setting method F .....................................................................................................156  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Ap p e n d ice s .......................................... 1 5 7  
Convenient functions............................................................................158  
Setting the input mode....................................................................................................158  
Specifying the button mode ...........................................................................................158  
Specifying the port...........................................................................................................159  
Sys Ex. ASSIGN items .....................................................................................................160  
Specifying the checksum........................................................................................160  
Specifying the location of the data .......................................................................161  
Inputting channel/ block data ...............................................................................162  
V-LINK mode ...................................................................................................................163  
Memory sets ..........................................................................................164  
GM2 set (MEMORY: 0)...........................................................................................164  
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) SET ..........................................................................165  
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/ SX) SET ....................................................................166  
H-COMPATIBLE (ProTools LE, Digital Performer) SET (MEMORY: 9)........167  
GS SET ......................................................................................................................167  
XG SET......................................................................................................................169  
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................170  
Problems related to the USB driver...............................................................................170  
Deleting the driver ...........................................................................................................173  
MIDI implementation .............................................................................174  
Main specifications ...............................................................................179  
INDEX .....................................................................................................180  
204  
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
206j  
* Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® operating system”.  
206e  
* Screen shots in this documents are reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.  
207  
* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.  
209  
* MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.  
220  
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their  
respective owners.  
231  
* OMS is a registered trademark of Opcode Systems, Inc.  
232  
* FreeMIDI is a trademark of Mark of the Unicorn, Inc.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Co n te n ts o f th e p a ck a g e  
The PCR-30/ 50/ 80 includes the following items. When you open the package, first make sure that all  
items are included. If any are missing, contact the dealer where you purchased the PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
●MIDI Keyboard Controller  
PCR-30/50/80  
fig.pcr-80  
*This figure is the PCR-30.  
●AC adaptor  
This is the only AC adaptor you should use with the PCR-30/ 50/ 80. Do not use any AC adaptor  
other than the supplied one, since doing so may cause malfunction.  
●USB cable  
Use this to connect the USB connector of your computer with the USB connector of the  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80. For details on connections and driver installation, refer to Setup (p. 13).  
* Please use only the included USB cable. If you require a replacement due to loss or damage, please contact  
a “EDIROL/Roland Service Center” listed in the “Information” section at the end of this manual.  
●CD-ROM  
This contains drivers and editors for use with the PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
●Template sheets (two sheets)  
One of these templates lists the messages that are assigned to the knobs and sliders (controllers) by  
GM2 memory (memory no. 0). A blank sheet is also included for you to make a note of your own  
controller settings.  
●Owner’s Manual  
This is the manual you are reading. Please keep it on hand for reference.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
N a m e s o f th in g s a n d w h a t th e y d o  
Pa n e l  
fig.panelA_50  
1
2
1 2  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0  
1 1  
1 . Power Indicator  
Lights when the power is on.  
2 . Controllers [R1]–[R8]  
You can assign MIDI messages to these controllers.  
3 . V-LINK Button  
Press the V-LINK button to enter V-LINK mode (p. 163). When V-LINK mode is on, the  
V-LINK button will light.  
V-LINK  
V-LINK (  
) is a function that lets you play music and images. By using this with  
a V-LINK compatible video device, you can enjoy various video effects that are linked to your  
performance.  
4 . MEMORY Button  
Accesses memories that are stored within the PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
5 . MIDI CH Button  
Specifies the transmission channel (“current channel”) for the keyboard and bender.  
6 . PROGRAM CHANGE Button  
Transmits program change messages on the current channel.  
7 . EDIT Button  
Used to assign MIDI messages to the controllers.  
8 . DEC Button  
Decreases the value of a setting by one (except in PLAY mode (p. 116)).  
9 . INC Button  
Increases the value of a setting by one (except in PLAY mode (p. 116)).  
1 0 . HEX Button  
When not in PLAY mode, sets the input mode to hexadecimal (HEX input mode).  
1 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Names of things and what they do  
1 1 . DECIMAL Button  
When not in PLAY mode, sets the input mode to decimal (DECIMAL input mode).  
1 2 . Controllers [B1]–[B6]  
You can assign MIDI messages to these controllers.  
fig.panelB_50  
1 3  
1 4  
1 3 . Display  
Indicates the current status and various other information.  
USB  
Lights if the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is connected to your computer via USB.  
DATA OUT  
HEX  
This will blink when MIDI messages are transmitted via USB or MIDI OUT.  
Lights when the value shown in the display is hexadecimal.  
1 4 . Controllers [S1]–[S8]  
You can assign MIDI messages to these controllers.  
fig.panelC_50  
1 5 . Controllers [L1]–[L3]  
You can assign MIDI messages to these  
controllers.  
1 5  
1 7  
1 6 . TRANSPOSE/ENTER Button  
Use [TRANSPOSE] + [OCTAVE -/+] to  
transpose the pitch of the keyboard in semitone  
steps. Also, in any mode except PLAY mode,  
it functions as the [ENTER] button, which  
you need to press to confirm the settings  
you've made.  
1 6  
1 8  
1 7 . OCTAVE -/+  
Press [OCTAVE -/+] to shift the pitch of the  
keyboard up or down in steps of an octave.  
When not in PLAY mode, use these buttons to  
return to the previous setting item (the [BACK]  
button) or to cancel the setting and return to  
PLAY mode (the [CANCEL] button).  
1 8 . BENDER Lever  
This lever can be used to modify the pitch  
or apply vibrato.  
1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Names of things and what they do  
Re a r Pa n e l  
fig.rear_50  
2 0  
2 1  
2 2  
2 3  
2 4  
2 5  
2 0 . Security Slot (  
) [PCR-30/50]  
A commercially available security lock can be attached here.  
http:/ / www.kensington.com/  
2 1 . AC adaptor jack  
Connect the include AC adaptor to this jack. Insert the plug firmly so it won’t get unplugged  
accidentally.  
2 2 . Power switch  
DC  
Power on using the AC adaptor  
OFF  
Power is off  
USB *1  
Power on using a USB cable (when not using the AC adaptor)  
*1 Bus power (USB)  
BUS power can be used when the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is connected to your computer via a USB  
cable. In this case, the power will be supplied from your computer via the USB cable. To use  
the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 with bus power, set the power switch to USB.  
* For some computers, the PCR-30/50/80 may not operate if bus power is used. In this case, use the  
included AC adaptor.  
2 3 . USB connector  
Use this when connecting the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 to your computer via a USB cable.  
2 4 . MIDI IN/OUT connectors  
These can be connected to the MIDI connectors of other MIDI devices to transmit and receive  
MIDI messages.  
2 5 . Controller [P1] and [P2]  
You can connect the appropriate type of pedals to these jacks and use them as controllers.  
HOLD  
Connect a pedal switch to this jack and use it as a Hold pedal.  
Connect an expression pedal to this jack and use it to control tone  
or volume in real time.  
EXPRESSION  
You can also assign MIDI messages to these controllers as desired.  
1 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Se tu p  
This section explains how to install the drivers needed for connecting  
the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 to a computer, and make the necessary settings.  
English  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows) .............................. (p. 14)  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh) ............................ (p. 25)  
Deutsch  
Français  
Italiano  
Español  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows) .................. (p. 33)  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh) ................ (p. 46)  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows) ....................... (p. 55)  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh) ..................... (p. 66)  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows) ................. (p. 74)  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh) ............... (p. 85)  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows) ............ (p. 94)  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh) .......... (p. 105)  
What is a driver?  
A “driver” is software that transfers data between the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 and application software  
running on your computer, when your computer and the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 are connected by a  
USB cable. The driver sends data from your application to the PCR-30/ 50/ 80, and from the  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80 to your application.  
1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
In sta llin g & Se ttin g Up th e  
Drive r (W in d o w s)  
Drive r In sta lla tio n  
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.  
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.  
•
•
•
Windows XP users ............................................... (p. 14)  
Windows 2000 users ............................................ (p. 18)  
Windows Me/ 98 users ........................................ (p. 21)  
● Windows XP users  
If you are using Windows  
XP Professional, you must  
log on using a user name  
with an administrative  
account type (e.g.,  
1
With the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 disconnected, start up Windows.  
Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse  
(if used).  
Administrator). For details  
on user accounts, please  
consult the system  
2
Open the System Properties dialog box.  
1 . Click the Windows Start menu, and from the menu, select Control  
administrator of your  
computer.  
Panel.  
2 . In “Pick a category”, click “Performance and Maintenance”.  
3 . In “or pick a Control Panel icon”, click the System icon.  
Depending on how your  
system is set up, the  
System icon may be  
displayed directly in the  
Control Panel (the Classic  
display). In this case,  
double-click the System  
icon.  
fig.2-1  
3
Click the Hardware tab, and then  
click [Driver Signing].  
Open the Driver Signing Options  
dialog box.  
4
Make sure that “What action do  
you want Windows to take?”  
is set to “Ignore”.  
If you changed “What  
action do you want  
Windows to take?” in  
step 4, you must restore  
the previous setting after  
you have installed the  
driver.  
If it is set to “Ignore”, simply  
click [OK].  
If it is not set to “Ignore”, make  
a note of the current setting  
(“Warn” or “Block”). Then change  
the setting to “Ignore” and  
click [OK].  
1 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
5
6
Click [OK] to close the System Properties dialog box.  
Exit all currently running software (applications).  
Also close any open windows. If you are using virus checking or similar  
software, be sure to exit it as well.  
7
8
Prepare the CD-ROM.  
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
Click the Windows start button. From the menu that appears, select  
“Run...”.  
Open the “Run...” dialog box.  
fig.2-3_30  
9
In the dialog box that appears,  
input the following into the  
“Open” field, and click [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name of your  
CD-ROM drive.  
10  
The SetupInf dialog box will appear.  
Once the connections have  
been completed, turn on  
power to your various  
devices in the order  
You are now ready to install the driver.  
11  
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
specified. By turning on  
devices in the wrong  
order, you risk causing  
malfunction and/ or  
damage to speakers and  
other devices.  
1 . With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the  
PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.  
3 . Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
This unit is equipped with  
a protection circuit. A brief  
interval (a few seconds)  
after power up is required  
before the unit will operate  
normally.  
12  
Set the PCR-30/ 50/ 80’s power switch to the ON position.  
Near the task bar, your computer will indicate “Found New Hardware”.  
Please wait.  
1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
13  
The Found New Hardware Wizard will appear.  
Make sure that the screen indicates “EDIROL PCR”, select“Install from a list  
or specific location (Advanced)”, and click [Next].  
fig.2-7  
14  
The screen will indicate “Please  
choose your search and  
installation options”.  
Select “Don’t search. I will  
choose the driver to install”,  
and click [Next].  
15  
Make sure that the “Model” field indicates “EDIROL PCR”, and click  
[Next]. Driver installation will begin.  
If the “What action do you want Windows to take?” setting was not set to “Ignore”,  
a “Hardware Installation” dialog box will appear.  
If “What action do you want Windows to take?” is set to “Warn”  
1 . Click [Continue Anyway].  
2 . Continue the installation.  
If “What action do you want Windows to take?” is set to “Block”  
1 . Click [OK].  
2 . When the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears, click [Finish].  
3 . Perform the installation as described in the “Troubleshooting” section on Device Manager  
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (p. 172).  
fig.2-9_30  
16  
17  
The Insert Disk dialog box will appear.  
The Insert Disk dialog  
may not appear. In that  
case, proceed to step 17.  
Click [OK].  
The Files Needed dialog box will appear.  
Input the following into the “Copy files from” field, and click [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K  
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name of your  
CD-ROM drive.  
1 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
18  
19  
The Found New Hardware Wizard will appear.  
Make sure that the display indicates “EDIROL PCR”, and click [Finish].  
Wait until “Found New Hardware” appears near the taskbar.  
When driver installation has been completed, the System Setting Change  
dialog box will appear.  
Click [Yes]. Windows will restart automatically.  
If you changed “What action do you want Windows to take?”  
If you changed the What action do you want Windows to take? setting, restore the  
original setting after Windows restarts.  
1 . If you are using Windows XP Professional, log on to Windows using the user name  
of an administrative account (e.g., Administrator).  
2 . Click the Windows start menu, and from the menu, select Control Panel.  
3 . In “Pick a category”, click “Performance and Maintenance”.  
4 . In “or pick a Control Panel icon”, click the System icon. The System Properties  
dialog box will appear.  
* Depending on how your system is set up, the System icon may be displayed directly in the Control  
Panel (the Classic display). In this case, double-click the System icon.  
5 . Click the Hardware tab, and then click [Driver Signing]. The Driver Signing Options  
dialog box will appear.  
6 . Return the What action do you want Windows to take? setting to the  
original setting (either “Warn” or “Block”), and click [OK].  
7 . Click [OK]. The System properties dialog box will close.  
Next, you need to make the driver settings.  
(● MIDI input and output destinations (p. 23))  
1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
● Windows 2000 users  
1
With the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 disconnected, start up Windows.  
Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse  
(if used).  
2
3
Log on to Windows as a user with administrative privileges (such as  
Administrator).  
Open the System Properties dialog box.  
Click the Windows Start button, and from the menu that appears, select  
Settings | Control Panel. In Control Panel, double-click the System icon.  
fig.2-12  
4
Click the Hardware tab, and then  
click [Driver Signing].  
Open the Driver Signing Options  
dialog box.  
5
Make sure that “File signature  
verification” is set to “Ignore”.  
If it is set to “Ignore”, simply  
click [OK].  
If you changed the “File  
signature verification”  
setting in step 5, you must  
restore the previous setting  
after you have installed  
the driver.  
If it is not set to “Ignore”, make  
a note of the current setting  
(“Warn” or “Block”). Then change  
the setting to “Ignore” and  
click [OK].  
6
7
Close the System Properties dialog box.  
Click [OK].  
Exit all currently running software (applications).  
Also close any open windows. If you are using virus checking or similar  
software, be sure to exit it as well.  
8
Prepare the CD-ROM.  
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
1 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
9
Click the Windows Start button. From the menu that appears, select  
“Run...”.  
Open the “Run...” dialog box.  
fig.2-14_40  
10  
In the dialog box that appears,  
input the following into the  
“Open” field, and click [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name  
of your CD-ROM drive.  
Once the connections have  
been completed, turn on  
power to your various  
devices in the order  
11  
The SetupInf dialog box will appear.  
You are now ready to install the driver.  
specified. By turning on  
devices in the wrong  
order, you risk causing  
malfunction and/ or  
damage to speakers and  
other devices.  
12  
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
1 . With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the  
PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.  
3 . Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
This unit is equipped with  
a protection circuit. A brief  
interval (a few seconds)  
after power up is required  
before the unit will operate  
normally.  
13  
Set the PCR-30/ 50/ 80’s power switch to the ON position.  
If the “File signature verification” setting was not set to “Ignore”, a “Digital Signature  
Not Found” dialog box will appear.  
If “File signature verification” is set to “Warn”  
1 . Click [Yes].  
2 . Continue the installation.  
If “File signature verification” is set to “Block”  
1 . Click [OK].  
2 . When the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears, click [Finish].  
3 . Perform the installation as described in the “Troubleshooting” section on Device Manager  
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (p. 172).  
1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
14  
The Insert Disk dialog box will appear.  
If the Insert Disk dialog  
box does not appear,  
please read The “Insert  
Disk” dialog box does  
not appear (p. 171).  
Click [OK].  
15  
The Files Needed dialog box will appear.  
Input the following into the “Copy files from” field, and click [OK].  
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K  
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name of your  
CD-ROM drive.  
16  
The “Found New Hardware Wizard” may be displayed.  
Verify that “EDIROL PCR” is displayed, and click [Finish].  
17  
The System Settings Change dialog box may appear.  
Click [Yes]. Windows will restart automatically.  
If you changed “File signature verification”  
If you changed the “File signature verification” setting, restore the original setting after  
Windows restarts.  
1 . After Windows restarts, log in to Windows as a user with administrative privileges,  
(such as Administrator).  
2 . In the Windows desktop, right-click the My Computer icon, and from the menu that  
appears, select Properties. The System Properties dialog box will appear.  
3 . Click the Hardware tab, and then click [Driver signature]. The Driver Signing  
Options dialog box will appear.  
4 . Return the “File signature verification” setting to the original setting (either “Warn”  
or “Block”), and click [OK].  
5 . Click [OK]. The System properties dialog box will close.  
Next, you need to make the driver settings.  
(● MIDI input and output destinations (p. 23))  
2 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
● Windows Me/98 users  
1
With the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 disconnected, start up Windows.  
Disconnect all USB cables except for a USB keyboard and USB mouse  
(if used).  
2
Exit all currently running software (applications).  
Also close any open windows. If you are using virus checking or similar  
software, be sure to exit it as well.  
3
4
Prepare the CD-ROM.  
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
Click the Windows Start button. From the menu that appears, select  
“Run...”.  
Open the “Run...” dialog box.  
fig.2-19a_30  
5
In the dialog box that appears,  
input the following into the  
“Open” field, and click [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE  
Once the connections have  
been completed, turn on  
power to your various  
devices in the order  
* The drive name “D:” may be different for your system. Specify the drive name of your  
CD-ROM drive.  
6
7
specified. By turning on  
devices in the wrong  
order, you risk causing  
malfunction and/ or  
damage to speakers and  
other devices.  
The SetupInf dialog box will appear.  
You are now ready to install the driver.  
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
1 . With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the  
PCR-30/50/80.  
This unit is equipped with  
a protection circuit. A brief  
interval (a few seconds)  
after power up is required  
before the unit will operate  
normally.  
2 . Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.  
3 . Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
8
Set the PCR-30/ 50/ 80’s power switch to the ON position.  
2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
9
The driver will be installed automatically.  
10  
In the dialog box, click [OK].  
* If a message recommends that you restart Windows, restart Windows as directed.  
Next, you need to make the driver settings.  
(● MIDI input and output destinations (p. 23))  
2 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
Se ttin g s  
● MIDI input and output destinations  
Windows XP/2000/Me users  
1
Open Control Panel.  
Click the Windows Start button, and from the menu that appears, select  
Settings | Control Panel.  
Windows XP  
Click the Windows start button, and from the menu that appears, select  
Depending on how your  
system is set up, the  
Control Panel.  
Sounds and Audio  
2
Devices icon may be  
displayed directly in the  
Control Panel (the Classic  
display). In this case,  
Open the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties dialog box (or in  
Windows 2000/ Me, Sounds and Multimedia Properties).  
Windows XP  
In “Pick a category”, click “Sound, Speech, and Audio Devices”.  
Next, in “or pick a Control Panel icon”, click the sounds and Audio  
Devices icon.  
double-click the Sounds  
and Audio Devices icon.  
Windows 2000/Me  
In Control Panel, double-click the Sounds and Multimedia icon to open  
the “Sounds and Multimedia Properties” dialog box.  
3
Click the Audio tab.  
fig.2-28_30  
Select the appropriate  
MIDI device for your  
system. You do not  
4
For MIDI music playback, click the ●  
located at the right of [Default device]  
(or in Windows 2000/ Me, [Preferred  
device]), and select the MIDI device from  
the list that appears.  
necessarily have to select  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
For details on port, refer  
to .“About the ports  
when using a USB  
If you want to use Media Player to play  
a sound module connected to the PCR's  
MIDI OUT connector, select EDIROL PCR  
MIDI OUT.  
connection” (p. 159).  
5
Close the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties dialog box.  
Click OK to complete the settings.  
2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Windows)  
6
Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the  
For details on MIDI device  
settings, refer to the  
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to About the ports when using a USB  
connection (p. 159).  
owner's manual for the  
software you are using.  
This completes driver settings.  
Windows 98 users  
1
2
Open Control Panel.  
Click the Windows Start button, and from the menu that appears, select  
Settings | Control Panel.  
Open the Multimedia Properties dialog box.  
In Control Panel, double-click the Multimedia icon to open the “Multimedia  
Properties” dialog box.  
fig.2-29_30  
3
Click the MIDI tab.  
Select the appropriate  
MIDI device for your  
system. You do not  
4
Set “MIDI output”.  
Select [Single instrument], and select  
the MIDI device from the list that  
appears.  
necessarily have to select  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
For details on port, refer to  
“About the ports  
If you want to use Media Player to  
play a sound module connected to the  
PCR's MIDI OUT connector, select  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
5
6
Close the Multimedia Properties  
dialog box.  
Click OK to complete the settings.  
For details on MIDI device  
settings, refer to the  
Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the  
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to “About the ports when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
owner's manual for the  
software you are using.  
This completes driver settings.  
2 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In sta llin g & Se ttin g Up th e  
Drive r (Ma cin to sh )  
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.  
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.  
•
•
Mac OS 9/ 8 users ................................................. (p. 25)  
Mac OS X users ..................................................... (p. 31)  
Ma c O S 9 / 8 u se rs  
● Installing the driver  
Use either OMS or FreeMIDI as the MIDI driver.  
The included PCR driver is an add-on module for using the PCR-30/ 50/ 80  
with OMS or FreeMIDI.  
OMS can be found in the  
OMS 2.3.8 E folder within  
the OMS folder of the  
CD-ROM. If you would  
like to know more about  
OMS, refer to  
* Either OMS or FreeMIDI must be installed in your Macintosh, as appropriate  
for the sequencer software you are using.  
OMS_2.0E_Mac.pdf  
which can be found in  
the same folder.  
* Disconnect the PCR-30/50/80 from the Macintosh before you perform the installation.  
If a PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is already connected to your Macintosh when you install the driver, a message  
like the following will appear when the Macintosh is started up. Perform the steps described below  
as appropriate for the message that is displayed.  
If the screen indicates:  
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for driver  
on the Internet?”  
● click [Cancel].  
If the screen indicates:  
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please refer  
to the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”.  
● click [OK].  
Use the following procedure to install the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 driver.  
1
2
Exit all currently running software (applications).  
If you are using a virus checker or similar software, be sure to exit this as well.  
Prepare the CD-ROM.  
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)  
3
Double-click the PCR Driver-E Installer icon (found in the Driver E (Mac  
OS 9, 8) folder of the CD-ROM) to start up the installer.  
4
Verify the Install Location, and click [Install].  
fig.3-2_40  
5
If a message like the following is  
displayed, click [Continue].  
The other currently running  
applications will exit, and  
installation will continue.  
6
A dialog box will indicate Installation completed.  
Click [Restart] to restart your Macintosh.  
● Setting the driver  
OMS settings  
Once the connections have  
been completed, turn on  
power to your various  
devices in the order  
1
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
1 . With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the  
specified. By turning on  
devices in the wrong  
order, you risk causing  
malfunction and/ or  
damage to speakers and  
other devices.  
PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.  
3 . Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
2
Set the PCR-30/ 50/ 80’s power switch to the ON position.  
fig.3-3  
This unit is equipped with  
a protection circuit. A brief  
interval (a few seconds)  
after power up is required  
before the unit will operate  
normally.  
3
From the CD-ROM, drag the Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) -  
OMS Setting folder to the hard disk of your Macintosh to  
copy it.  
fig.3-4  
4
In the Opcode-OMS Application folder where you  
installed OMS, double-click OMS Setup to start it up.  
2 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)  
fig.3-5_35  
5
If a dialog box like the one shown  
here appears, click [Turn It Off].  
A confirmation dialog box will  
then appear, so click [OK].  
We recommend that you  
turn off AppleTalk, by  
selecting Chooser from  
the Apple menu.  
fig.3-6_35  
6
The Create a New Studio Setup  
dialog box will appear. Click  
[Cancel].  
If you accidentally clicked [OK],  
click [Cancel] in the next screen.  
fig.3-8_35  
7
Choose “Open” from the  
File menu.  
From the Setting folder that  
you copied in step 3, select  
the PCR file, and click [Open].  
A screen like the one shown  
here will appear.  
fig.3-9_35  
8
From the Edit menu, select OMS  
MIDI Setup.  
In the OMS MIDI Setup dialog box  
that appears, check Run MIDI in  
background, and click [OK].  
2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)  
fig.3-10  
9
From the File menu, choose  
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.  
Make Current.  
If you are unable to select Make  
Current, it has already been  
applied, and you may continue  
to the next step.  
10  
Verify that MIDI transmission and reception can be performed correctly.  
From the Studio menu, choose Test Studio.  
fig.3-22_50  
11  
Try playing the keyboard of the  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80. If the arrow beside  
number 2 or 3 in the diagram at  
right blinks, the settings have been  
made correctly.  
For details on port, refer  
to “About the ports  
when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
When you move the mouse cursor  
near the MIDI connector icon, the  
cursor will change to a ꢀ shape.  
If a MIDI sound module is  
connected to the PCR-30/ 50/ 80's  
MIDI OUT connector, click the  
MIDI connector icon shown in the  
diagram at the right. If you hear  
sound, the settings have been  
made correctly.  
For details on connecting a  
MIDI sound module, refer  
to the owner's manual for  
your MIDI sound module.  
12  
13  
Exit OMS Setup.  
From the File menu, choose [Exit]. If the AppleTalk confirmation dialog box  
appears, click [OK] to close the dialog box.  
For details on MIDI device  
settings, refer to the  
owner's manual for the  
software you are using.  
Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the  
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to “About the ports when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
This completes the series of steps needed to connect the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 to the  
Macintosh, install the MIDI driver, and make the driver settings.  
2 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)  
● FreeMIDI settings  
Once the connections have  
been completed, turn on  
power to your various  
devices in the order  
1
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
1 . With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the  
specified. By turning on  
devices in the wrong  
order, you risk causing  
malfunction and/ or  
damage to speakers  
and other devices.  
PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.  
3 . Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
2
3
Set the PCR-30/ 50/ 80’s power switch to the ON position.  
This unit is equipped with  
a protection circuit. A brief  
interval (a few seconds)  
after power up is required  
before the unit will operate  
normally.  
From the CD-ROM, copy the Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) – FreeMIDI Setting  
folder onto the hard disk of your Macintosh.  
4
5
Open the FreeMIDI Applications folder from the location into which you  
installed FreeMIDI, and double-click the FreeMIDI Setup icon to start it up.  
The first time you start up, use the following procedure.  
1 . A dialog box saying “Welcome to FreeMIDI!” will appear.  
When “OMS is installed  
on this computer...”  
Click [Continue].  
appears, click [FreeMIDI].  
2 . When the FreeMIDI Preferences dialog box appear.  
Click [Cancel].  
3 . The About Quick Setup dialog box will appear.  
Click [Cancel].  
If you are unable to select  
Open, make settings as  
follows.  
6
7
8
From the File menu, choose Open.  
1 . From the File menu,  
choose FreeMIDI  
Preference.  
Select PCR from the FreeMIDI Setting folder you copied in step 3, and  
click [Open].  
2 . Uncheck “Use OMS  
when available.”  
Verify that MIDI transmission and reception occur correctly.  
3 . Close FreeMIDI.  
From the MIDI menu, choose Check Connections.  
4 . Return to step 4 and  
continue the procedure.  
2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)  
fig.3-13_40  
9
Try playing the keyboard of the  
For details on port, refer to  
“About the ports  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80. If the number 2 or 3  
in the diagram at right blinks, the  
settings have been made correctly.  
when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
If a MIDI sound module is  
connected to the PCR-30/ 50/ 80's  
MIDI OUT connector, click the  
MIDI connector icon shown in the  
diagram at the right. If you hear  
sound, the settings have been made  
correctly.  
For details on connecting a  
MIDI sound module, refer  
to the owner's manual for  
your MIDI sound module.  
10  
Once again choose the MIDI menu command Check Connections to end  
the test.  
11  
12  
From the File menu, choose Quit to exit FreeMIDI Setup.  
For details on MIDI device  
settings, refer to the  
Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the  
owner's manual for the  
software you are using.  
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to “About the ports when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
This completes the series of steps needed to connect the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 to the  
Macintosh, install the MIDI driver, and make the driver settings.  
3 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)  
Ma c O S X Use rs  
● Installing the driver  
1
Disconnect all USB cables other than those for your keyboard and mouse,  
and restart your Macintosh.  
2
3
Prepare the CD-ROM.  
Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
In the Driver (Mac OS X) folder of the CD-ROM, double-click  
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.  
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, click the lock symbol for authentication.  
4
5
In the authentication dialog box, input the password and click [OK].  
The display will indicate “Welcome to EDIROL PCR USB Driver  
installation”.  
Click [Continue].  
6
7
The display will indicate “Important message”.  
Read the contents and click [Continue].  
The display will indicate “Select the location for installation”.  
Click the drive in which the operating system is installed to select it, and  
then click [Continue].  
8
9
The display will indicate “Easy installation”.  
Click Install or Upgrade.  
The display will indicate “When you install this software, you must  
restart your computer after the installation is complete”.  
Click [Continue installation].  
10  
The display will indicate “The software was successfully installed”.  
Click [Restart] to restart your computer.  
3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)  
Cautions when using the PCR  
Before you use your sequencer software, please note the following points.  
* Connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer via a USB cable before you start up your sequencer or other  
software.  
* Do not disconnect the USB cable from the PCR-30/50/80 while your sequencer or other software  
is running.  
* Disconnect the USB cable from the PCR-30/50/80 only after you have quit your sequencer or other  
software.  
* Leave the Sleep function of your Macintosh turned off.  
* The PCR-30/50/80 will not work in the Classic environment of Mac OS X. Use the PCR when the Classic  
environment is not running.  
● Setting the driver  
1
Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
1 . With the power switch turned OFF, connect the AC adaptor to the  
PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Connect the AC adaptor to an electrical outlet.  
3 . Use the USB cable to connect the PCR-30/50/80 to your computer.  
2
Set the PCR-30/ 50/ 80’s power switch to the ON position.  
For details on MIDI device  
settings, refer to the  
3
Make MIDI device settings on your sequencer software. For details on the  
MIDI OUT/IN device to select, refer to “About the ports when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
owner's manual for the  
software you are using.  
This completes the series of steps needed to connect the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 to the  
Macintosh, install the MIDI driver, and make the driver settings.  
3 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In sta llie re n u n d Ein rich te n d e s  
Tre ib e rs (W in d o w s)  
Tre ib e rin sta lla tio n  
Die Vorgehensweise bei der Installation hängt von Ihrem System ab.  
Bitte lesen Sie abhängig von dem von Ihnen verwendeten System in einem  
der folgenden Abschnitte weiter.  
•
•
•
Windows XP-Anwender .....................................(S. 33)  
Windows 2000-Anwender...................................(S. 38)  
Windows Me/ 98-Anwender ..............................(S. 42)  
● Windows XP-Anwender  
Wenn Sie Windows XP  
Professional verwenden,  
müssen Sie sich mit einem  
Benutzernamen vom Typ  
Administrationskonto  
(zum Beispiel Admi-  
nistrator) anmelden.  
1
Starten Sie Windows, wobei das PCR-30/ 50/ 80 ausgesteckt ist.  
Stecken Sie alle USB-Kabel außer der USB-Tastatur und der USB-Maus  
aus (falls vorhanden).  
2
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften.  
Einzelheiten zu  
Benutzerkonten erfahren  
Sie vom Systemadmi-  
nistrator Ihres Computers.  
1 . Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche [Start] und wählen Sie im  
daraufhin angezeigten Menü Systemsteuerung.  
2 . Klicken Sie in “Wählen Sie eine Kategorie” auf “Leistung und  
Wartung”.  
3 . Klicken Sie in “oder wählen Sie ein Systemsteuerungssymbol”  
auf das Symbol System.  
Abhängig von der  
Konfiguration Ihres  
Systems kann es vorkom-  
men, dass das Symbol  
System nicht sofort in  
der Systemsteuerung  
(in der klassischen  
Anzeige) angezeigt wird.  
Doppelklicken Sie in  
diesem Fall auf das  
System-Symbol.  
3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
fig.2-1  
3
Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte  
Hardware und klicken Sie  
anschließend auf  
[Treibersignierung].  
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld  
Treibersignaturoptionen.  
4
Prüfen Sie, ob “Wie soll  
Windows vorgehen?” auf  
Wenn Sie “Wie soll  
Windows vorgehen?” in  
Schritt 4 geändert haben,  
müssen Sie die vorherigen  
Einstellungen wieder  
herstellen, nachdem Sie  
den Treiber installiert  
haben.  
“Ignorieren” eingestellt ist.  
Wenn “Ignorieren” eingestellt ist,  
klicken Sie einfach auf [OK].  
Wenn “Ignorieren” nicht  
eingestellt ist, notieren Sie sich die  
aktuelle Einstellung (“Warnen” oder “Sperren”). Anschließend ändern Sie  
die Einstellung auf “Ignorieren” und klicken auf [OK].  
5
Klicken Sie auf [OK], um das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften zu schließen.  
6
Beenden Sie alle aktuell ausgeführten Programme (Anwendungen).  
Schließen Sie außerdem alle noch geöffneten Programmfenster. Wenn Sie ein  
Virenschutzprogramm oder ähnliche Software verwenden, müssen Sie diese  
ebenfalls beenden.  
7
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.  
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Computers ein.  
8
Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche Start. Wählen Sie im daraufhin  
angezeigten Menü die Option “Ausführen...”.  
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Ausführen... .  
fig.2-3_30  
9
Geben Sie im angezeigten Dialogfeld  
Folgendes in das Feld “Öffnen” ein  
und klicken Sie auf [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt  
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.  
3 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
10  
11  
Das Dialogfeld SetupInf wird angezeigt.  
Nachdem die Anschlüsse  
fertig gestellt wurden,  
schalten Sie die verschie-  
denen Geräte in der  
Jetzt kann der Treiber installiert werden.  
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer  
angegebenen Reihenfolge  
ein. Wenn Sie die Geräte in  
der falschen Reihenfolge  
einschalten, besteht die  
Gefahr von Fehlfunktionen  
und/ oder Schäden an  
Lautsprechern und  
zu verbinden.  
1 . Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter den  
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen  
Steckdose.  
anderen Geräten.  
3 . Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem  
Computer zu verbinden.  
12  
13  
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in die Position ON.  
Dieses Gerät ist mit  
einem Schutzschaltkreis  
ausgestattet. Nach dem  
Einschalten benötigt das  
Gerät eine kurze  
Der Computer zeigt neben der Task-Leiste folgende Meldung an: “Neue  
Hardware gefunden”. Bitte warten Sie.  
Der Assistent für das Suchen neuer Hardware erscheint.  
Zeitspanne (einige  
Sekunden), bis es den  
normalen Betrieb  
Prüfen Sie, ob der Bildschirm “EDIROL PCR” anzeigt, wählen Sie “Software  
von einer Liste oder bestimmten Quelle installieren (für fortgeschrittene  
Benutzer)” und klicken Sie auf [Weiter].  
aufnimmt.  
fig.2-7  
14  
Im Bildschirm wird folgende  
Meldung angezeigt: “Wählen  
Sie die Such- und  
Installationsoptionen”.  
Wählen Sie “Nicht suchen.  
sondern den zu installierenden  
Treiber selbst wählen”, und  
klicken Sie auf [Weiter].  
3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
15  
Prüfen Sie, ob das Feld “Modell” “EDIROL PCR” anzeigt und klicken  
Sie auf [Weiter]. Die Installation des Treibers beginnt.  
Wenn die Einstellung für “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?” nicht “Ignorieren” lautet, wird  
das Dialogfeld “Hardware-Installation” angezeigt.  
Wenn für Wie soll Windows vorgehen? “Warnen” aktiviert wurde,  
1 . klicken Sie auf [Trotzdem fortsetzen].  
2 . Setzen Sie die Installation fort.  
Wenn für “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?” “Sperren” aktiviert wurde,  
1 . Klicken Sie auf [OK].  
2 . Wenn der Assistent für das Suchen neuer Hardware erscheint, klicken Sie auf  
[Beenden].  
3 . Führen Sie die Installation aus, wie im Abschnitt “Fehlerbehebung” in Device Manager shows  
“?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (S. 172) beschrieben.  
fig.2-9_30  
16  
Das Dialogfeld Diskette einlegen wird angezeigt.  
Das Dialogfeld Diskette  
einlegen wird eventuell  
nicht angezeigt. Arbeiten  
Sie in diesem Fall mit  
Schritt 17 weiter.  
Klicken Sie auf [OK].  
17  
Das Dialogfeld Benötigte Dateien wird angezeigt.  
Geben Sie im angezeigten Dialogfeld Folgendes in das Feld “Dateien  
kopieren von” ein und klicken Sie auf [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K  
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt  
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.  
18  
Der Assistent für das Suchen neuer Hardware erscheint.  
Prüfen Sie, ob EDIROL PCR angezeigt wird, und klicken Sie auf [Beenden].  
Warten Sie, bis die Meldung “Neue Hardware gefunden” in der Nähe der  
Task-Leiste angezeigt wird.  
19  
Nachdem der Treiber installiert wurde, wird das Dialogfeld Geänderte  
Systemeinstellungen angezeigt.  
Klicken Sie auf [Ja]. Windows startet anschließend automatisch neu.  
3 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
Wenn Sie die Einstellung für “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?” geändert haben  
Wenn Sie die Einstellung “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?” geändert haben, müssen Sie die  
ursprüngliche Einstellung nach dem Neustart von Windows wiederherstellen.  
1 . Wenn Sie Windows XP Professional verwenden, melden Sie sich in Windows mit  
dem Benutzernamen eines Administrationskontos an (z.B. Administrator).  
2 . Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche [Start] und wählen Sie im daraufhin  
angezeigten Menü Systemsteuerung.  
3 . Klicken Sie in “Wählen Sie eine Kategorie” auf “Leistung und Wartung”.  
4 . Klicken Sie in “oder wählen Sie ein Systemsteuerungssymbol” auf das Symbol  
System. Daraufhin werden die Systemeigenschaften angezeigt.  
* Abhängig von der Konfiguration Ihres Systems kann es vorkommen, dass das Symbol System nicht  
sofort in der Systemsteuerung (in der klassischen Anzeige) angezeigt wird. Doppelklicken Sie in  
diesem Fall auf das Symbol System.  
5 . Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Hardware und klicken Sie anschließend auf  
[Treibersignierung]. Daraufhin werden die Treibersignaturoptionen angezeigt.  
6 . Stellen Sie die ursprünglichen Einstellungen für “Wie soll Windows vorgehen?”  
wieder her (entweder “Warnen” oder “Sperren”) und klicken Sie auf “OK”.  
7 . Klicken Sie auf [OK]. Das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften wird geschlossen.  
Als nächstes nehmen Sie die Einstellungen für den Treiber vor.  
(● Eingabe- und Ausgabeziele für MIDI (S. 44))  
3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
● Windows 2000-Anwender  
1
Starten Sie Windows, wobei das PCR-30/ 50/ 80 ausgesteckt ist.  
Stecken Sie alle USB-Kabel außer der USB-Tastatur und der USB-Maus aus  
(falls vorhanden).  
2
Melden Sie sich in Windows als Benutzer mit Administratorrechten an  
(z.B. als Administrator).  
3
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften.  
Klicken Sie in Windows auf Start und wählen Sie im daraufhin angezeigten  
Menü Einstellungen - Systemsteuerung. Doppelklicken Sie in der  
Systemsteuerung auf das System-Symbol.  
fig.2-12  
4
Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte  
Hardware und klicken Sie  
anschließend auf  
[Treibersignierung].  
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld  
Treibersignaturoptionen.  
5
Stellen Sie sicher, dass für  
“Dateisignaturverifizierung”  
“Ignorieren” aktiviert ist.  
Wenn Sie die Einstellung  
“Dateisignaturverifi-  
zierung” in Schritt 5  
geändert haben, müssen  
Sie die früheren Einstel-  
lungen wieder herstellen,  
nachdem Sie den Treiber  
installiert haben.  
Wenn “Ignorieren” eingestellt ist,  
klicken Sie einfach auf [OK].  
Wenn “Ignorieren” nicht  
eingestellt ist, notieren Sie sich die aktuelle Einstellung (“Warnen” oder  
“Sperren”). Anschließend ändern Sie die Einstellung auf “Ignorieren” und  
klicken auf [OK].  
6
Schließen Sie das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften.  
Klicken Sie auf [OK].  
7
Beenden Sie alle aktuell ausgeführten Programme (Anwendungen).  
Schließen Sie außerdem alle noch geöffneten Programmfenster. Wenn Sie ein  
Virenschutzprogramm oder ähnliche Software verwenden, müssen Sie diese  
ebenfalls beenden.  
3 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
8
9
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.  
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Computers ein.  
Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche Start. Wählen Sie im daraufhin  
angezeigten Menü die Option “Ausführen...”  
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Ausführen....  
fig.2-14_40  
10  
Geben Sie im angezeigten  
Dialogfeld Folgendes in das  
Feld “Öffnen” ein und klicken  
Sie auf [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt  
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.  
Nachdem die Anschlüsse  
fertig gestellt wurden,  
schalten Sie die verschie-  
denen Geräte in der  
11  
Das Dialogfeld SetupInf wird angezeigt.  
Jetzt kann der Treiber installiert werden.  
angegebenen Reihenfolge  
ein. Wenn Sie die Geräte in  
der falschen Reihenfolge  
einschalten, besteht die  
Gefahr von Fehlfunktionen  
und/ oder Schäden an  
Lautsprechern und  
12  
13  
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer  
zu verbinden.  
1 . Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter den  
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80  
.
anderen Geräten.  
2 . Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen Steckdose.  
3 . Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem  
Computer zu verbinden.  
Dieses Gerät ist mit  
einem Schutzschaltkreis  
ausgestattet. Nach dem  
Einschalten benötigt  
das Gerät eine kurze  
Zeitspanne (einige  
Sekunden), bis es den  
normalen Betrieb  
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in die Position ON.  
aufnimmt.  
3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
Wenn in für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” nicht “Ignorieren” aktiviert wurde, erscheint  
die Meldung “Digitalsignatur nicht gefunden”.  
Wenn für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” “Warnen” aktiviert ist,  
1 . Klicken Sie auf [Ja].  
2 . Setzen Sie die Installation fort.  
Wenn für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” “Sperren” aktiviert ist,  
1 . Klicken Sie auf [OK].  
2 . Wenn der Assistent für das Suchen neuer Hardware erscheint, klicken Sie auf [Beenden].  
3 . Führen Sie die Installation aus, wie im Abschnitt “Fehlerbehebung” in Device Manager shows  
“?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (S. 172) beschrieben.  
14  
Das Dialogfeld Diskette einlegen wird angezeigt.  
Wenn das Dialogfeld  
Klicken Sie auf [OK].  
Diskette einlegen nicht  
angezeigt wird, lesen Sie  
bitte The “Insert Disk”  
dialog box does not  
appear (S. 171)  
15  
Das Dialogfeld Benötigte Dateien wird angezeigt.  
Geben Sie im angezeigten Dialogfeld Folgendes in das Feld “Dateien  
kopieren von” ein und klicken Sie auf [OK].  
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K  
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt  
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.  
16  
Das Dialogfeld “Neue Hardware gefunden” wird eventuell angezeigt.  
Prüfen Sie, ob “EDIROL PCR” angezeigt wird und klicken Sie auf  
[Beenden].  
17  
Möglicherweise wird das Dialogfeld Geänderte Systemeinstellungen  
angezeigt.  
Klicken Sie auf [Ja]. Windows startet anschließend automatisch neu.  
4 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
Wenn Sie “Dateisignaturverifizierung” geändert haben  
Wenn Sie die Einstellung für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” geändert haben, müssen Sie  
die ursprüngliche Einstellung nach dem Neustart von Windows wiederherstellen.  
1 . Nachdem Windows neu gestartet ist, melden Sie sich als Benutzer mit  
Administratorrechten an (z.B. als Administrator).  
2 . Klicken Sie auf dem Windows Desktop mit der rechten Maustaste auf das Symbol  
Arbeitsplatz und wählen Sie im daraufhin angezeigten Menü Eigenschaften.  
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften angezeigt.  
3 . Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Hardware und klicken Sie anschließend auf  
[Treibersignierung]. Daraufhin werden die Treibersignaturoptionen angezeigt.  
4 . Stellen Sie die ursprünglichen Einstellungen für “Dateisignaturverifizierung” wieder  
her (“Warnen” oder “Sperren”) und klicken Sie auf [OK].  
5 . Klicken Sie auf [OK]. Das Dialogfeld Systemeigenschaften wird geschlossen.  
Als nächstes nehmen Sie die Einstellungen für den Treiber vor.  
(● Eingabe- und Ausgabeziele für MIDI (S. 44))  
4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
● Windows Me/98-Anwender  
1
Starten Sie Windows, wobei das PCR-30/ 50/ 80 ausgesteckt ist.  
Stecken Sie alle USB-Kabel außer der USB-Tastatur und der USB-Maus aus  
(falls vorhanden).  
2
Beenden Sie alle aktuell ausgeführten Programme (Anwendungen).  
Schließen Sie außerdem alle noch geöffneten Programmfenster. Wenn Sie ein  
Virenschutzprogramm oder ähnliche Software verwenden, müssen Sie diese  
ebenfalls beenden.  
3
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.  
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Computers ein.  
4
Klicken Sie auf die Windows-Schaltfläche Start. Wählen Sie im daraufhin  
angezeigten Menü die Option “Ausführen...”.  
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Ausführen....  
fig.2-19a_30  
5
Geben Sie im angezeigten  
Dialogfeld Folgendes in das  
Feld “Öffnen” ein und klicken  
Sie auf [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE  
* Der Laufwerknamen “D:” kann auf Ihrem System anders lauten. Geben Sie statt  
dessen den Laufwerknamen Ihres CD-ROM-Laufwerks an.  
6
Das Dialogfeld SetupInf wird angezeigt.  
Jetzt kann der Treiber installiert werden.  
4 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
7
8
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer  
Nachdem die Anschlüsse  
fertig gestellt wurden,  
schalten Sie die  
zu verbinden.  
1 . Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter den  
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80.  
verschiedenen Geräte in  
der angegebenen  
2 . Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen  
Reihenfolge ein. Wenn Sie  
die Geräte in der falschen  
Reihenfolge einschalten,  
besteht die Gefahr von  
Fehlfunktionen und/ oder  
Schäden an Lautsprechern  
und anderen Geräten.  
Steckdose.  
3 . Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem  
Computer zu verbinden.  
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in die Position ON.  
Dieses Gerät ist mit einem  
Schutzschaltkreis  
ausgestattet. Nach dem  
Einschalten benötigt das  
Gerät eine kurze  
9
Der Treiber wird automatisch installiert werden.  
Klicken Sie im Dialogfeld auf [OK].  
Zeitspanne (einige  
Sekunden), bis es den  
normalen Betrieb  
10  
* Wenn Sie eine Meldung erhalten, die Ihnen empfiehlt, Windows neu zu starten,  
aufnimmt.  
starten Sie Windows neu.  
Als nächstes nehmen Sie die Einstellungen für den Treiber vor.  
(● Eingabe- und Ausgabeziele für MIDI (S. 44))  
4 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
Ein ste llu n g e n  
● Eingabe- und Ausgabeziele für MIDI  
Windows XP/2000/Me-Anwender  
1
Öffnen Sie die Systemsteuerung.  
Klicken Sie in Windows auf Start und wählen Sie im daraufhin angezeigten  
Menü Einstellungen - Systemsteuerung.  
Windows XP  
Klicken Sie in Windows auf Start und wählen Sie im daraufhin  
angezeigten Menü Systemsteuerung.  
Abhängig von der  
Konfiguration Ihres  
Systems kann es  
2
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften von Sounds und Audiogeräte  
vorkommen, dass das  
Symbol Sounds und  
Audiogeräte nicht sofort  
in der Systemsteuerung  
(in der klassischen  
(bzw. in Windows 2000/ Me Eigenschaften von Sounds und Multimedia).  
Windows XP  
Klicken Sie in “Wählen Sie eine Kategorie” auf “Sounds, Sprachein-/  
ausgabe und Audiogeräte”. Klicken Sie danach in “oder wählen Sie  
ein Systemsteuerungssymbol” auf das Symbol Sounds und  
Audiogeräte.  
Anzeige) angezeigt  
wird. In diesem Fall  
doppelklicken Sie auf  
das Symbol Sounds  
und Audiogeräte.  
Windows 2000/Me  
Doppelklicken Sie in der Systemsteuerung auf das Symbol [Sounds  
und Multimedia], um das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften für Sounds und  
Multimedia zu öffnen.  
3
Klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte Audio.  
fig.2-28_30  
4
Wählen Sie das  
Klicken Sie bei MIDI-Musikwiedergabe auf  
entsprechende MIDI-Gerät  
für Ihr System. Sie müssen  
nicht unbedingt EDIROL  
PCR MIDI OUT  
das ●, das sich rechts von [Standardgerät]  
befindet (bzw. in Windows 2000/ Me rechts  
von [Bevorzugtes Gerät]) und wählen  
Sie das MIDI-Gerät aus der angezeigten  
Liste aus.  
auswählen.  
Wenn Sie den Media Player verwenden  
möchten, um ein Soundmodul abzuspielen,  
das mit dem MIDI-OUT-Stecker des PCRs  
verbunden ist, wählen Sie EDIROL PCR  
MIDI OUT.  
Einzelheiten zu den  
Anschlüssen erhalten Sie  
unter “About the ports  
when using a USB  
connection” (S. 159).  
5
Schließen Sie das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften von Sounds und Audiogeräte.  
Klicken Sie auf [OK], um die Konfiguration abzuschließen.  
4 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Windows)  
6
Nehmen Sie die MIDI-Geräteeinstellungen auf Ihrer Sequenzer-Software  
Detaillierte Informationen  
zu den MIDI-Geräteein-  
stellungen finden Sie im  
Handbuch Ihrer Software.  
vor. Wenn Sie weitere Informationen zu dem MIDI OUT/IN-Gerät erhalten  
möchten, lesen Sie bitte About the ports when using a USB connection  
(S. 159).  
Damit sind die Treibereinstellungen abgeschlossen.  
Windows 98-Anwender  
1
Öffnen Sie die Systemsteuerung.  
Klicken Sie in Windows auf Start und wählen Sie im daraufhin angezeigten  
Menü Einstellungen - Systemsteuerung.  
2
Öffnen Sie das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften für Multimedia.  
Doppelklicken Sie in der Systemsteuerung auf das Symbol [Multimedia],  
um das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften für Multimedia zu öffnen.  
fig.2-29_30Klicken Sie auf das Register MIDI  
3
Wählen Sie das  
Konfigurieren Sie die  
entsprechende MIDI-Gerät  
für Ihr System. Sie müssen  
nicht unbedingt EDIROL  
PCR MIDI OUT  
“MIDI-Ausgabe”.  
Wählen Sie [Einzelnes Instrument]  
und wählen Sie das MIDI-Gerät aus  
der angezeigten Liste.  
auswählen.  
Wenn Sie den Media Player  
verwenden möchten, um ein  
Soundmodul abzuspielen, das mit  
dem MIDI-OUT-Stecker des PCRs  
verbunden ist, wählen Sie EDIROL  
PCR MIDI OUT.  
Einzelheiten zu dem  
Anschluss erhalten Sie  
unter “About the ports  
when using a USB  
connection” (S. 159).  
4
Schließen Sie das Dialogfeld Eigenschaften für Multimedia.  
Klicken Sie auf [OK], um die Konfiguration abzuschließen.  
Detaillierte Informationen  
zu den MIDI-Geräteein-  
stellungen finden Sie im  
Handbuch Ihrer Software.  
5
Nehmen Sie die MIDI-Geräteeinstellungen auf Ihrer Sequenzer-Software  
vor. Wenn Sie weitere Informationen zu dem MIDI OUT/IN-Gerät erhalten  
möchten, lesen Sie bitte “About the ports when using a USB connection”  
(S. 159).  
Damit sind die Treibereinstellungen abgeschlossen.  
4 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In sta llie re n u n d Ein rich te n  
d e s Tre ib e rs (Ma cin to sh )  
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.  
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.  
•
•
Mac OS 9/ 8 users ................................................. (S. 46)  
Mac OS X users ..................................................... (S. 52)  
Ma c O S 9 / 8 -Be n u tze r  
● Installation des Treibers  
Der PCR-30/50/80 OMS-Treiber im Lieferumfang ist ein Add-On-Modul für  
die Verwendung des PCR-30/ 50/ 80 mit OMS oder FreeMIDI.  
OMS befindet sich im  
Ordner OMS 2.3.8 E, der  
sich im Ordner OMS der  
CD-ROM befindet. Wenn  
Sie mehr über OMS  
* Entsprechend der von Ihnen verwendeten Sequenzer-Software muss auf Ihrem  
Macintosh entweder OMS oder FreeMIDI installiert sein.  
erfahren möchten,  
lesen Sie bitte die Datei  
OMS_2.3_Mac.pdf  
(Online-Handbuch)  
im Ordner OMS2.3.8E,  
der sich im Ordner OMS  
der CD-ROM befindet.  
Installieren Sie den PCR-30/ 50/ 80-Treiber wie anschließend beschrieben.  
* Trennen Sie das PCR-30/50/80 vom Macintosh, bevor Sie die Installation ausführen.  
Wenn das PCR-30/ 50/ 80 eingeschaltet wird, wird eine Meldung ähnlich der folgenden Meldung  
angezeigt, wenn der Macintosh hochgefahren wird. Gehen Sie abhängig von der angezeigten  
Meldung vor wie nachfolgend beschrieben.  
Wenn die Meldung lautet:  
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for  
driver on the Internet?”  
●klicken Sie auf “Cancel”.  
Wenn die Meldung lautet:  
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please refer  
to the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”  
● klicken Sie auf [OK].  
4 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)  
1
Beenden Sie alle aktuell ausgeführten Programme (Anwendungen).  
Wenn Sie ein Virenschutzprogramm oder ähnliche Software verwenden,  
müssen Sie diese ebenfalls beenden.  
2
3
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.  
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk ein.  
Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol PCR Driver-E Installer (das sich im  
Ordner Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) -OMS auf der CD-ROM befindet), um das  
Installationsprogramm zu starten.  
4
Prüfen Sie den Installationsort und klicken Sie auf [Install]  
fig.3-2_40  
5
Falls eine Meldung wie abgebildet  
angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf  
[Continue].  
Alle anderen aktuell ausgeführten  
Anwendungen werden  
anschließend beendet und die Installation wird fortgesetzt.  
6
Ein Dialogfeld zeigt Folgendes an: Installation completed.  
Klicken Sie auf [Restart] , um den Macintosh neu zu starten.  
4 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)  
● Einstellungen  
OMS-Einstellungen  
Bevor Sie die OMS-Einstellungen prüfen können, müssen Sie ein  
MIDI-Soundmodul mit dem MIDI OUT-Anschluss des PCR-30/ 50/ 80  
verbinden.  
Nachdem die Anschlüsse  
fertig gestellt wurden,  
schalten Sie die verschie-  
denen Geräte in der  
1
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer  
zu verbinden.  
angegebenen Reihenfolge  
ein. Wenn Sie die Geräte in  
der falschen Reihenfolge  
einschalten, besteht die  
Gefahr von Fehlfunktionen  
und/ oder Schäden an  
Lautsprechern und  
1 . Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter das  
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80  
.
2 . Verbinden Sie das Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen Steckdose.  
3 . Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem  
Computer zu verbinden.  
anderen Geräten.  
2
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in die Position ON.  
fig.3-3  
Vergewissern Sie sich  
stets, dass die Lautstärke  
reduziert wurde, bevor Sie  
den Netzschalter betätigen.  
Beim Einschalten wird  
eventuell auch dann  
3
Ziehen Sie den Ordner Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - OMS  
Setting auf der CD-ROM auf die Festplatte Ihres  
Macintosh, um ihn zu kopieren.  
fig.3-4  
Sound ausgegeben, wenn  
der Lautstärkeregler ganz  
zurückgestellt wurde.  
Das ist jedoch normal  
und kein Anzeichen für  
eine Fehlfunktion.  
4
Doppelklicken Sie im Ordner Opcode-OMS  
Application, in dem Sie OMS installiert haben, auf OMS  
Setup, um die Installation zu starten.  
fig.3-5_35  
5
Wenn ein Dialogfeld ähnlich dem  
abgebildeten Dialogfeld angezeigt  
wird, klicken Sie auf [Turn It Off].  
Anschließend wird ein Dialogfeld  
für die Bestätigung angezeigt.  
Klicken Sie hier auf [OK].  
Wir empfehlen Ihnen,  
AppleTalk zu  
deaktivieren, indem  
Sie im Apfelmenü den  
Chooser auswählen.  
4 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)  
fig.3-6_35  
6
Das Dialogfeld Create a New  
Studio Setup wird angezeigt.  
Klicken Sie auf [Cancel].  
Wenn Sie versehentlich auf [OK]  
geklickt haben, klicken Sie im  
nächsten Bildschirm auf [Cancel].  
fig.3-8_35  
7
Wählen Sie “Open” im Menü File.  
Wählen Sie im Ordner Setting ,  
den Sie in Schritt 3 kopiert haben,  
die Datei PCR, und klicken  
Sie auf [Open].  
Ein Dialogfeld ähnlich dem  
hier gezeigten Dialogfeld  
wird angezeigt.  
fig.3-9_35  
8
Wählen Sie im Menü Edit die  
Option OMS MIDI Setup.  
Aktivieren Sie im daraufhin  
angezeigten Dialogfeld OMS  
MIDI Setup die Option Run MIDI  
in background und klicken Sie  
auf [OK].  
fig.3-10  
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.  
9
Wählen Sie im Menü File die  
Option Make Current.  
Wenn Sie die Option Make Current  
nicht auswählen können, wurde sie  
bereits angewendet und Sie können  
mit dem nächsten Schritt  
weiterarbeiten.  
fig.3-11_50  
10  
Prüfen Sie, ob die MIDI-Übertragung und der MIDI-Empfang fehlerfrei  
funktionieren. Wählen Sie im Menü Studio die Option Test Studio.  
4 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)  
fig.3-22_50  
11  
Drücken Sie die Tasten des  
Keyboards. Die Einstellungen  
wurden korrekt durchgeführt  
wenn der Pfeil neben Nummer 2  
oder 3 im Diagramm rechts blinkt.  
Der Mauszeiger nimmt die Form  
einer Note wenn er in der Nähe  
des MIDI Connector Symbols  
gehalten wird.  
Weitere Informationen  
zum Anschluss eines  
MIDI-Soundmoduls  
erhalten Sie im  
Benutzerhandbuch für  
Ihr MIDI-Soundmodul.  
Bei Anschluß eines MIDI  
Soundmoduls über den MIDI OUT  
des PCR 30/ 50/ 80 sollte bei  
Klicken des Midi Symbols ein Ton erklingen.  
12  
Beenden Sie OMS Setup.  
Wählen Sie im Menü File die Option [Exit]. Klicken Sie im Dialogfeld  
AppleTalk Confirmation auf [OK], um das Dialogfeld zu schließen.  
Damit wurden die Schritte ausgeführt, die erforderlich sind, um das  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80 mit Ihrem Macintosh zu verbinden, die MIDI-Treiber  
zu installieren und die Treiber zu konfigurieren.  
5 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)  
Einstellungen für FreeMIDI  
1
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer  
Nachdem die Anschlüsse  
fertig gestellt wurden,  
schalten Sie die  
zu verbinden.  
1 . Verbinden Sie bei ausgeschaltetem Netzschalter das  
verschiedenen Geräte in  
der angegebenen  
Wechselstromadapter mit dem PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Verbinden Sie das Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen  
Reihenfolge ein. Wenn Sie  
die Geräte in der falschen  
Reihenfolge einschalten,  
besteht die Gefahr von  
Fehlfunktionen und/ oder  
Schäden an Lautsprechern  
und anderen Geräten.  
Steckdose.  
3 . Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem  
Computer zu verbinden.  
2
3
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in die Position ON.  
Ziehen Sie den Ordner Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - FreeMIDI Setting auf der  
Vergewissern Sie sich stets,  
dass die Lautstärke  
CD-ROM auf die Festplatte Ihres Macintosh, um ihn zu kopieren.  
reduziert wurde, bevor Sie  
den Netzschalter betätigen.  
Beim Einschalten wird  
eventuell auch dann Sound  
ausgegeben, wenn der  
Lautstärkeregler ganz  
zurückgestellt wurde.  
Das ist jedoch normal und  
kein Anzeichen für eine  
Fehlfunktion.  
4
Öffnen Sie den Ordner FreeMIDI Applications an dem Ort, an dem Sie  
FreeMIDI installiert haben, und doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol FreeMIDI  
Setup , um die Installation zu starten.  
5
6
7
8
Wenn “OMS is installed on this computer...” angezeigt wird, klicken Sie  
auf [FreeMIDI].  
Wenn die Software zum ersten Mal ausgeführt wird, wird das Dialogfeld  
“Welcome to FreeMIDI!” angezeigt. Klicken Sie auf [Continue].  
Wenn das Dialogfeld FreeMIDI Preferences angezeigt wird, klicken Sie  
auf [Cancel]  
.
Wenn das Dialogfeld About Quick Setup angezeigt wird, klicken Sie  
auf [Cancel].  
9
Wählen Sie im Menü File die Option Open.  
10  
Wählen Sie im Ordner FreeMIDI Setting , den Sie in Schritt 3 kopiert haben,  
die Datei PCR, und klicken Sie auf [Open].  
11  
Prüfen Sie, ob die MIDI-Übertragung und der MIDI-Empfang fehlerfrei  
erfolgen.Wählen Sie im Menü MIDI die Option Check Connections.  
5 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)  
fig.3-13_40  
12  
Bei Anschluß eines MIDI  
Soundmoduls über den MIDI OUT  
des PCR 30/ 50/ 80 sollte bei Klicken  
des Midi Symbols ein Ton erklingen.  
Weitere Informationen  
zum Anschluss eines  
MIDI-Soundmoduls  
erhalten Sie im  
Benutzerhandbuch für  
Ihr MIDI-Soundmodul.  
13  
Wählen Sie im Menü MIDI erneut den Befehl Check Connections, um den  
Test zu beenden.  
14  
Wählen Sie im Menü File die Option Quit, um FreeMIDI Setup zu beenden.  
Damit wurden die Schritte ausgeführt, die erforderlich sind, um das  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80 mit Ihrem Macintosh zu verbinden, die MIDI-Treiber  
zu installieren und die Treiber zu konfigurieren.  
Ma c O S X-Be n u tze r  
● Installation des Treibers  
1
Stecken Sie alle USB-Kabel außer der Tastatur und der Maus aus, und  
starten Sie den Macintosh neu.  
2
Halten Sie die CD-ROM bereit.  
Legen Sie die CD-ROM in das CD-ROM-Laufwerk Ihres Computers ein.  
3
Doppelklicken Sie im Ordner Driver (Mac OS X) auf der CD-ROM auf  
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.  
Klicken Sie unter Mac OS X v10.1.5 auf das Schlüsselsymbol für die  
Authentifizierung.  
4
Geben Sie in das Dialogfeld Authentication Ihr Kennwort ein und klicken  
Sie auf [OK].  
5 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)  
5
In der Anzeige wird “Welcome to EDIROL PCR USB Driver installation”  
angezeigt.  
Klicken Sie auf [Continue].  
6
7
In der Anzeige erscheint die Meldung “Important Message”.  
Lesen Sie diese Informationen und klicken Sie auf [Continue].  
In der Anzeige erscheint anschließend “Select the location for installation”.  
Klicken Sie auf das Laufwerk, auf dem das Betriebssystem installiert ist, um  
es auszuwählen, und klicken Sie anschließend auf [Continue].  
8
9
In dieser Anzeige erscheint anschließend “Easy installation”.  
Klicken Sie auf Install oder Upgrade.  
In der Anzeige erscheint anschließend: “When you install this software,  
you must restart your computer after the installation is complete”  
(Nach Installation ist ein Neustart erforderlich)  
Klicken Sie anschließend auf [Continue installation].  
10  
In der Anzeige erscheint Folgendes: “The software was successfully  
installed” (Das Programm wurde erfolgreich installiert).  
Klicken Sie auf [Restart], um Ihren Computer neu zu starten.  
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen bei der Verwendung des PCR  
Bevor Sie Ihr Sequenzerprogramm verwenden, beachten Sie bitte Folgendes.  
* Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem Computer zu verbinden, bevor Sie  
Ihren Sequenzer oder Ihre Software starten.  
* Trennen Sie das USB-Kabel nicht vom PCR-30/50/80, während Ihr Sequenzer oder andere Software  
ausgeführt wird.  
* Stecken Sie das USB-Kabel erst aus dem PCR-30/50/80 aus, nachdem Sie Ihren Sequenzer oder andere  
Software beendet haben.  
* Lassen Sie die Ruhezustandsfunktion Ihres Macintosh deaktiviert.  
* Das PCR-30/50/80 funktioniert nicht in der Classic-Umgebung von Mac OS X. Verwenden Sie das  
PCR, wenn die Classic-Umgebung nicht ausgeführt wird.  
5 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installieren und Einrichten des Treibers (Macintosh)  
● Konfiguration des Treibers  
1
Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem  
Computer zu verbinden.  
1 . Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit demPCR-30/50/80 bei  
AUSGESCHALTETEM Netzschalter.  
2 . Verbinden Sie den Wechselstromadapter mit einer elektrischen  
Steckdose.  
3 . Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel, um das PCR-30/50/80 mit Ihrem  
Computer zu verbinden.  
2
Bringen Sie den Netzschalter des PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in die Position ON.  
Detaillierte Informa-  
tionen zu den MIDI-  
Geräteeinstellungen  
erhalten Sie im Handbuch  
zu Ihrer Software.  
3
Nehmen Sie in Ihrem Sequenzerprogramm die Einstellungen für  
MIDI-Geräte vor. Nähere Informationen dazu, welches MIDI OUT/IN -  
Gerät ausgewählt werden sollte, erhalten Sie unter “About the ports  
when using a USB connection” (S. 159).  
Nun haben Sie die Schritte ausgeführt, die erforderlich sind, um den  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80 an den Macintosh anzuschließen, die MIDI-Treiber zu  
installieren und die Treiber zu konfigurieren.  
5 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In sta lla tio n e t co n fig u ra tio n  
d u p ilo te (W in d o w s)  
In sta lla tio n d u p ilo te  
La procédure d’installation dépend de votre système d’exploitation.  
Veuillez lire la section qui vous concerne.  
•
•
•
Windows XP.......................................................... (p. 55)  
Windows 2000....................................................... (p. 59)  
Windows Me/ 98 .................................................. (p. 62)  
● Windows XP  
Si vous utilisez  
1
Le PCR-30/ 50/ 80 étant débranché, démarrez Windows.  
Windows XP Professional,  
vous devez ouvrir une  
session avec un nom  
d’utilisateur disposant des  
droits d’administrateur.  
Pour plus de détails sur  
les comptes utilisateur,  
veuillez prendre contact  
avec l’administrateur  
système de votre  
Débranchez tous les câbles USB, à l’exception de ceux du clavier et de  
la souris (le cas échéant).  
2
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système.  
1 . Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows, puis, dans le menu qui  
s’affiche, choisissez Panneau de configuration.  
2 . Dans “Choisissez une catégorie”, cliquez sur “Performances  
ordinateur.  
et maintenance”.  
3 . Dans “ou choisissez une icône du Panneau de configuration”,  
cliquez sur l’icône Système.  
Selon la configuration de  
votre ordinateur, l’icône  
Système s’affiche peut-  
être dans le Panneau  
de configuration (Vue  
classique). Dans ce cas,  
cliquez deux fois sur  
l’icône Système.  
fig.2-1  
3
Cliquez sur l’onglet Matériel, puis  
cliquez sur [Signature du pilote].  
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Options  
de signature du pilote.  
4
Vérifiez que le paramètre “Que  
voulez- vous faire ?” est défini sur  
“Ignorer”.  
Si vous avez modifié  
“Que voulez-vous  
faire ?” à l’étape 4, vous  
devez restaurer le  
Si ce paramètre est réglé sur  
“Ignorer”, cliquez sur [OK].  
réglage précédent après  
installation du pilote.  
Si elle n’est pas définie sur “Ignorer”,  
notez le paramètre indiqué (“Avertir”  
ou “Bloquer”). Choisissez ensuite “Ignorer” et cliquez sur [OK].  
5 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
5
Cliquez sur [OK] pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Propriétés système.  
6
Quittez tous les logiciels (applications) actifs.  
Fermez également toutes les fenêtres éventuellement ouvertes. Si vous  
utilisez un anti-virus, quittez-le également.  
7
8
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.  
Introduisez-le dans le lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur.  
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows. Dans le menu qui s’affiche,  
sélectionnez “Exécuter...”.  
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue “Exécuter...” (voir ci-dessous).  
fig.2-3_30  
9
Dans la boîte de dialogue qui  
s’affiche, tapez ce qui suit dans  
le champ “Ouvrir”, puis cliquez  
sur [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* La lettre du lecteur“D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre  
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).  
Une fois les connexions  
effectuées, mettez sous  
tension les différents  
appareils dans l’ordre  
spécifié. Ne pas respecter  
cet ordre peut entraîner  
des dysfonctionnements  
et/ ou endommager les  
enceintes ou tout autre  
appareil.  
10  
La boîte de dialogue SetupInf s'affiche.  
Vous êtes maintenant prêt à installer le pilote.  
11  
Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
1 . L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur sur  
le PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).  
3 . Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
Cet appareil est équipé  
d'un circuit de protection.  
Après la mise sous tension,  
attendez quelques  
12  
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/ 50/ 80 sur ON.  
Près de la barre des tâches, votre ordinateur indique “Nouveau matériel  
détecté”. Veuillez patienter.  
secondes avant d'utiliser  
l’appareil.  
5 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
13  
La boîte de dialogue Assistant ajout de nouveau matériel s'affiche.  
Vérifiez que l’écran indique EDIROL PCR, sélectionnez Installer à partir  
d’une liste ou d’un emplacement spécifique (Avancé), puis cliquez  
sur [Suivant].  
fig.2-7  
14  
L’écran indiquera “Veuillez  
choisir vos options de  
recherche et d’installation”.  
Sélectionnez “Nepasrechercher.  
Je vais choisir le pilote à  
installer”, puis cliquez sur  
[Suivant].  
15  
Vérifiez que le champ Modèle indique EDIROL PCR, puis cliquez sur  
[Suivant]. L’installation du pilote commence.  
Si le paramètre “Que voulez-vous faire ?” n'est pas défini sur “Ignorer”, la boîte de  
dialogue “Installation du matériel” s'affiche.  
Si “Que voulez-vous faire ?” est définie sur “Avertir”  
1 . Cliquez sur [Continuer].  
2 . Poursuivez l’installation.  
Si “Que voulez-vous faire ?” est définie sur “Bloc”  
1 . Cliquez sur [OK].  
2 . Lorsque l’“Assistant ajout de nouveau matériel” s’affiche, cliquez sur [Terminer].  
3 . Procédez à l’installation comme décrit à la section “En cas de problème” (voir Device Manager  
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (p. 172).  
fig.2-9_30  
16  
17  
La boîte de dialogue Insérez le disque s'affiche.  
La boîte de dialogue  
Insérez le disque ne  
s'affiche pas. Dans ce cas,  
Cliquez sur [OK].  
La boîte de dialogue Fichiers nécessaires s'affiche.  
Tapez ce qui suit dans le champ “Copier les fichiers depuis”, puis cliquez  
sur [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K  
* La lettre du lecteur “D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre  
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).  
5 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
18  
La boîte de dialogue Assistant ajout de nouveau matériel s'affiche.  
Vérifiez que l’écran indique EDIROL PCR, puis cliquez sur [Terminer].  
Attendez que “Nouveau matériel détecté” s’affiche près de la barre  
des tâches.  
19  
Une fois l’installation du pilote terminée, la boîte de dialogue Modification  
des paramètres système s’affiche.  
Cliquez sur [Oui]. Windows redémarre automatiquement.  
Si vous avez modifié “Que voulez-vous faire ?”  
Si vous avez modifié “Que voulez-vous faire ?” restaurez le paramètre d’origine après  
le redémarrage de Windows.  
1 . Si vous utilisez Windows XP Professional, vous devez ouvrir une session avec un nom  
d’utilisateur disposant des droits d’administrateur.  
2 . Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui s’affiche, choisissez  
Panneau de configuration.  
3 . Dans “Choisissez une catégorie”, cliquez sur “Performances et maintenance”.  
4 . Dans “ou choisissez une icône du Panneau de configuration”, cliquez sur l’icône  
Système. La boîte de dialogue “Propriétés système” s'affiche.  
* Selon la configuration de votre ordinateur, l’icône Système s’affiche peut-être dans le Panneau  
de configuration (Vue classique). Dans ce cas, cliquez deux fois sur l’icône Système.  
5 . Cliquez sur l’onglet Matériel, puis cliquez sur [Signature du pilote]. La boîte de  
dialogue Options de signature du pilote s'affiche.  
6 . Restaurez le paramètre “Que voulez-vous faire ?” (“Avertir” ou “Bloquer”), puis  
cliquez sur [OK].  
7 . Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système se ferme.  
Vous devez ensuite procéder à la configuration du pilote.  
(● Paramètres d'entrée et de sortie MIDI (p. 64))  
5 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
● Windows 2000  
1
Le PCR-30/ 50/ 80 étant débranché, démarrez Windows.  
Débranchez tous les câbles USB, à l’exception de ceux du clavier et de  
la souris (le cas échéant).  
2
3
Ouvrez une session Windows en tant qu’utilisateur doté de droits  
d’administration (Administrateur, par exemple).  
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système.  
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui  
s’affiche, choisissez Paramètres | Panneau de configuration. Dans  
Panneau de configuration, cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Système.  
fig.2-12  
4
Cliquez sur l’onglet Matériel, puis  
cliquez sur[Signature du pilote].  
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue  
Options de signature du pilote.  
5
Assurez-vous que l'option  
“Vérification des signatures  
de fichiers” est définie sur  
“Ignorer”.  
Si vous avez modifié  
Vérifier la signature  
des fichiers à l’étape 5,  
vous devez restaurer le  
réglage précédent après  
installation du pilote.  
Si ce paramètre est réglé sur  
“Ignorer”, cliquez sur [OK].  
S'il n’est pas défini sur “Ignorer”,  
notez le paramètre indiqué  
(“Avertir” ou “Bloquer”). Choisissez ensuite “Ignorer” et cliquez sur [OK].  
6
7
Fermez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système.  
Cliquez sur [OK].  
Quittez tous les logiciels (applications) actifs.  
Fermez également toutes les fenêtres éventuellement ouvertes. Si vous  
utilisez un anti-virus, quittez-le également.  
8
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.  
Introduisez-le dans le lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur.  
5 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
9
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows. Dans le menu qui s’affiche,  
sélectionnez “Exécuter...”.  
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue “Exécuter...” (voir ci-dessous).  
fig.2-14_40  
10  
Dans la boîte de dialogue qui  
s’affiche, tapez ce qui suit dans  
le champ “Ouvrir”, puis cliquez  
sur [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* La lettre du lecteur “D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre  
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).  
Une fois les connexions  
effectuées, mettez sous  
tension les différents  
appareils dans l’ordre  
spécifié. Ne pas respecter  
cet ordre peut entraîner  
des dysfonctionnements  
et/ ou endommager les  
enceintes ou tout autre  
appareil.  
11  
La boîte de dialogue SetupInf s'affiche.  
Vous êtes maintenant prêt à installer le pilote.  
12  
Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
1 . L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur sur  
le PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).  
Cet appareil est équipé  
d'un circuit de protection.  
Après la mise sous tension,  
attendez quelques  
3 . Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
13  
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/ 50/ 80 sur ON.  
secondes avant d'utiliser  
l’appareil.  
Si l’option “Vérification de la signature des pilotes” n’a pas été définie sur “Ignorer”, une boîte  
de dialogue “Signature numérique introuvable” s’affiche.  
Si “Vérification des signatures des fichiers” est défini sur “Avertir”  
1 . Cliquez sur [Oui].  
2 . Poursuivez l’installation.  
Si “Vérification des signatures des fichiers” est définie sur “Bloquer”  
1 . Cliquez sur [OK].  
2 . Lorsque l’“Assistant ajout de nouveau matériel” s’affiche, cliquez sur [Terminer].  
3 . Procédez à l’installation comme décrit à la section “En cas de problème” (voir Device Manager shows  
“?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (p. 172).  
6 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
14  
15  
La boîte de dialogue Insérez le disque s'affiche.  
Si la boîte de dialogue  
Insérez le disque ne  
s’affiche pas, lisez la  
section The “Insert Disk”  
dialog box does not  
appear (p. 171)  
Cliquez sur [OK].  
La boîte de dialogue Fichiers nécessaires s'affiche.  
Tapez ce qui suit dans le champ “Copier les fichiers depuis”, puis cliquez  
sur [OK].  
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K  
* La lettre du lecteur “D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre  
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).  
16  
La boîte de dialogue Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté peut s'afficher.  
Vérifiez que EDIROL PCR est affiché, puis cliquez sur [Terminer].  
17  
La boîte de dialogue Modification des paramètres système peut s'afficher.  
Cliquez sur [Oui]. Windows redémarre automatiquement.  
Si vous avez modifié l’option “Vérification de la signature  
des fichiers”  
Si vous avez modifié “Vérification des signatures des fichiers”, restaurez le paramètre  
original après le redémarrage de Windows.  
1 . Une fois Windows redémarré, ouvrez une session Windows avec des privilèges  
d’administration, (par exemple, en ouvrant une session Administrateur).  
2 . Sur le bureau Windows, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l’icône Poste de  
travail puis, dans le menu qui s’affiche, sélectionnez Propriétés. La boîte de dialogue  
Propriétés Système s'affiche.  
3 . Cliquez sur l’onglet Profils matériels, puis cliquez sur [Signature des pilotes].  
La boîte de dialogue Options de signature du pilote s'affiche.  
4 . Restaurez l’option “Vérification de la signature des fichiers” à sa valeur d’origine  
(“Avertir” ou “Bloquer”), puis cliquez sur [OK].  
5 . Cliquez sur [OK]. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés Système se ferme.  
Vous devez ensuite procéder à la configuration du pilote.  
(● Paramètres d'entrée et de sortie MIDI (p. 64))  
6 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
● Windows Me/98  
1
Le PCR-30/ 50/ 80 étant débranché, démarrez Windows.  
Débranchez tous les câbles USB, à l’exception de ceux du clavier et de  
la souris (le cas échéant).  
2
Quittez tous les logiciels (applications) actifs.  
Fermez également toutes les fenêtres éventuellement ouvertes. Si vous  
utilisez un anti-virus, quittez-le également.  
3
4
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.  
Introduisez-le dans le lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur.  
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows. Dans le menu qui s’affiche,  
sélectionnez “Exécuter...”.  
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue “Exécuter...” (voir ci-dessous).  
fig.2-19a_30  
5
Dans la boîte de dialogue qui  
s’affiche, tapez ce qui suit dans  
le champ “Ouvrir”, puis cliquez  
sur [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE  
* La lettre du lecteur “D:” n’est pas forcément celle de votre ordinateur. Tapez la lettre  
affectée au lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur (par exemple, E: ou F:).  
6
La boîte de dialogue SetupInf s'affiche.  
Vous êtes maintenant prêt à installer le pilote.  
6 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
7
8
Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
1 . L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur  
sur le PCR-30/50/80  
Une fois les connexions  
effectuées, mettez sous  
tension les différents  
appareils dans l’ordre  
spécifié. Ne pas respecter  
cet ordre peut entraîner  
des dysfonctionnements  
et/ ou endommager les  
enceintes ou tout autre  
appareil.  
.
2 . Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).  
3 . Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur  
.
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/ 50/ 80 sur ON.  
9
Le pilote s'installe automatiquement.  
Cet appareil est équipé  
d'un circuit de protection.  
Après la mise sous tension,  
attendez quelques  
10  
Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur [OK].  
* Si un message vous recommande de relancer Windows, faites-le.  
secondes avant d'utiliser  
l’appareil.  
Vous devez ensuite procéder à la configuration du pilote.  
(● Paramètres d'entrée et de sortie MIDI (p. 64))  
6 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
Pa ra m è tre s  
● Paramètres d'entrée et de sortie MIDI  
Windows XP/2000/Me :  
1
Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration.  
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui s’affiche,  
choisissez Paramètres | Panneau de configuration.  
Windows XP  
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui  
s’affiche, choisissez Panneau de configuration.  
Selon la configuration  
de votre ordinateur, l’icône  
Sons et périphériques  
audio s’affiche peut-être  
dans le Panneau de  
configuration (Vue  
2
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés sons et périphériques multimédia  
(avec Windows 2000/ Me, Propriétés Son et multimédia).  
Windows XP  
classique). Dans ce cas,  
cliquez deux fois sur  
l’icône Sons et péri-  
phériques audio.  
Dans “Choisissez une catégorie”, cliquez sur “Son, voix et  
périphériques audio”. Dans “ou choisissez une icône du Panneau  
de configuration”, cliquez sur l’icône Sons et périphériques audio.  
Windows 2000/Me  
Dans le Panneau de configuration, cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Sons  
et Multimédia pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue “Propriétés de Sons  
et multimédia”.  
3
Cliquez sur l'onglet Audio.  
fig.2-28_30  
4
Pour Lecture MIDI, cliquez sur le ● situé  
Sélectionnez le périphé-  
rique MIDI approprié.  
Vous n'êtes pas obligé  
de sélectionner EDIROL  
PCR MIDI OUT.  
à droite de [Périphérique par défaut]  
(avec Windows 2000/ Me, [Périphérique  
par défaut]), puis sélectionnez un  
périphérique MIDI dans la liste  
qui s’affiche.  
Pour plus de détails sur  
cette connexion, reportez-  
vous à la section “About  
the ports when using a  
USB connection” (p. 159)  
Si vous voulez utiliser Media Player  
pour piloter un module de sons branché  
au connecteur MIDI OUT du PCR,  
sélectionnez EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
5
Fermez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés Son et périphériques multimédia.  
Cliquez sur [OK] pour terminer les réglages.  
6 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installation et configuration du pilote (Windows)  
6
Procédez aux réglages MIDI du périphérique dans votre application  
Pour plus de détails sur les  
réglages MIDI, reportez-  
vous au manuel de  
(séquenceur). Pour plus de détails sur le périphérique MIDI OUT/IN  
à sélectionner, reportez-vous à la section About the ports  
when using a USB connection (p. 159).  
l'application utilisée.  
Le paramétrage du pilote est terminé.  
Windows 98  
1
Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration.  
Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer de Windows, puis dans le menu qui  
s’affiche, choisissez Paramètres | Panneau de configuration.  
2
Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de Multimédia.  
Dans le Panneau de configuration, cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Multimédia  
pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de multimédia.  
fig.2-29_30  
3
Cliquez sur l'onglet MIDI.  
Sélectionnez le périphé-  
rique MIDI approprié.  
Vous n'êtes pas obligé  
de sélectionner EDIROL  
PCR MIDI OUT.  
4
Spécifiez la sortie MIDI (MIDI output).  
Sélectionnez [Single instrument], puis  
sélectionnez le périphérique MIDI dans  
la liste qui s'affiche.  
Si vous voulez utiliser Media Player  
pour piloter un module de sons  
branché au connecteur MIDI OUT  
du PCR, sélectionnez EDIROL  
PCR MIDI OUT.  
Pour plus de détails sur  
cette connexion, reportez-  
vous à la section “About  
the ports when using a  
USB connection” (p. 159).  
5
6
Fermez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de Multimédia.  
Cliquez sur [OK] pour terminer les réglages.  
Pour plus de détails sur les  
réglages MIDI, reportez-  
vous au manuel de  
Procédez aux réglages MIDI du périphérique dans votre application  
(séquenceur). Pour plus de détails sur le périphérique MIDI OUT/IN  
à sélectionner, reportez-vous à la section “About the ports when using  
a USB connection” (p. 159).  
l'application utilisée.  
Le paramétrage du pilote est terminé.  
6 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In sta lla tio n e t co n fig u ra tio n  
d u p ilo te (Ma cin to sh )  
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.  
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.  
•
•
Mac OS 9/ 8 users ................................................. (p. 66)  
Mac OS X users ..................................................... (p. 71)  
Utilisa te u rs Ma c O S 9 / 8  
● Installation du pilote  
Utilisation d’OMS ou de FreeMIDI comme pilote MIDI.  
Le pilote PCR-30/50/80 est un module supplémentaire fourni pour pouvoir  
faire fonctionner le PCR-30/ 50/ 80 avec OMS ou FreeMIDI.  
OMS se trouve dans  
le dossier OMS 2.3.8 E  
du dossier OMS sur  
le CD-ROM. Pour plus  
d'information sur OMS,  
veuillez lire le document  
OMS_2.3_Mac.pdf  
(manuel au format  
* OMS ou FreeMIDI doit être installé sur votre Macintosh, selon le logiciel  
séquenceur utilisé.  
Acrobat) situé dans  
le dossier OMS Driver  
du dossier OMS sur  
le CD-ROM.  
Procédez comme suit pour installer le pilote PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
* Débranchez l' PCR-30/50/80 du Macintosh avant d' effectuer l' installation.  
Si le PCR-30/ 50/ 80 est allumé, un message similaire à celui présenté ici s'affiche à la mise sous  
tension du Macintosh. Suivez une des procédures décrites ci-après, selon le message qui s'affiche.  
Si l'écran affiche :  
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for  
driver on the Internet?” ● Cliquez sur [Cancel].  
Si l'écran affiche :  
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please  
refer to the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”  
● Cliquez sur [OK].  
6 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)  
1
2
3
Quittez tous les logiciels (applications) actifs.  
Si vous utilisez un anti-virus, quittez-le également.  
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.  
Insérez le CD-ROM dans le lecteur de CD-ROM.  
Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône PCR Driver-E Installer (dans le dossier Driver  
E (Mac OS 9, 8) - OMS du CD-ROM) pour lancer l'installeur.  
4
Vérifiez l’emplacement de l’installation et cliquez sur [Install].  
fig.3-2_40  
5
Si un message du type suivant  
s’affiche, cliquez sur [Continuer].  
Les autres applications actives se  
ferment et l’installation continue.  
6
Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche : Installation completed.  
Cliquez sur [Redémarrer] pour redémarrer le Macintosh.  
● Paramètres  
Paramètres OMS  
Une fois les connexions  
effectuées, mettez sous  
tension les différents  
appareils dans l’ordre  
spécifié. Ne pas respecter  
cet ordre peut entraîner  
des dysfonctionnements  
et/ ou endommager les  
haut-parleurs ou tout autre  
appareil.  
1
Utilisez le câble USB pour relier le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
1 . L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur  
sur le PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).  
3 . Utilisez le câble USB pour relier le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
2
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/ 50/ 80 sur ON.  
fig.3-3  
fig.3-3  
Baissez toujours le volume  
avant la mise sous tension.  
Même avec le volume  
à zéro, il se peut que vous  
entendiez des sons lors de  
la mise sous tension, mais  
cela ne signifie rien  
3
Depuis le CD-ROM, faites glisser le dossier  
Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - OMS Setting vers le disque dur  
du Macintosh pour le copier.  
d'anormal.  
6 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)  
fig.3-4  
4
Dans le dossier Opcode-OMS Application où vous  
avez installé OMS, cliquez deux fois sur OMS Setup  
pour le lancer.  
fig.3-5_35  
5
Si une boîte de dialogue similaire à  
celle présentée ici s'affiche, cliquez  
sur [Turn It Off]. Une boîte de  
confirmation s'affiche, cliquez  
sur [OK].  
Nous vous reommandons  
de désactiver AppleTalk,  
en activant le Sélecteur  
dans le menu Apple.  
fig.3-6_35  
6
La boîte de dialogue Create a New  
Studio setup s'affiche. Cliquez  
sur [Annuler].  
Si vous avez cliqué sur [OK]  
par erreur, cliquez sur [Annuler]  
dans la boîte suivante.  
fig.3-7  
fig.3-8_35  
7
Choisissez “Open” dans le  
menu File.  
Dans le dossier Setting que vous  
avez copié à l'étape 3, sélectionnez  
le fichier PCR, puis cliquez  
sur [Open].  
Un écran similaire à celui  
présenté ici s'affiche.  
fig.3-9_35  
8
Dans le menu Edit, sélectionnez  
OMS MIDI Setup.  
Dans la boîte de dialogue  
OMS MIDI Setup qui s'affiche,  
sélectionnez Run MIDI in  
background (Lancer MIDI  
en tâche de fond), puis  
cliquez sur [OK].  
6 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)  
fig.3-10  
9
Dans le menu File, sélectionnez  
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.  
Make Current (Rendre actif).  
Si vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner  
Make Current, cela signifie qu'il  
est déjà activé et que vous pouvez  
passer à l'étape suivante.  
10  
Vérifiez que l'envoi et la réception MIDI fonctionnent correctement. Dans  
le menu Studio, sélectionnez Make Current (Rendre actif).  
fig.3-22_50  
11  
Pressez une touche du clavier du  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80. Si la flèche à côté  
du numéro 2 ou 3 sur le schéma  
de droite clignote, les réglages  
sont corrects.  
Pour plus d'informations  
sur la connexion d'un  
module de sons MIDI,  
reportez-vous à la  
Lorsque vous déplacez le curseur  
de la souris sur l'icône représentant  
une prise MIDI, le curseur se  
transforme en note de musique.  
documentation de votre  
module de sons MIDI.  
Si un module de sons est branché en  
sortie MIDI OUT du PCR-30/ 50/ 80, cliquer sur l'icône de prise MIDI  
du schéma de droite produira un son: les réglages sont alors corrects.  
12  
Quittez OMS Setup.  
Dans le menu File, choisissez [Exit]. Si la boîte de dialogue AppleTalk  
confirmation s'affiche, cliquez sur [OK] pour la fermer.  
La connexion du PCR-30/ 50/ 80 au Macintosh, l’installation du pilote MIDI  
ainsi que sa configuration sont terminées.  
6 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)  
Paramètres FreeMIDI  
Une fois les connexions  
effectuées, mettez sous  
tension les différents  
appareils dans l’ordre  
spécifié. Ne pas respecter  
cet ordre peut entraîner  
des dysfonctionnements  
et/ ou endommager les  
haut-parleurs ou tout  
autre appareil.  
1
Utilisez le câble USB pour relier le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
1 . L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur  
sur le PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).  
3 . Utilisez le câble USB pour relier le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
2
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/ 50/ 80 sur ON.  
Baissez toujours le volume  
avant la mise sous tension.  
Même avec le volume à  
zéro, il se peut que vous  
entendiez des sons lors  
de la mise sous tension,  
mais cela ne signifie  
3
Depuis le CD-ROM, copiez le dossier Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) – FreeMIDI  
Setting sur le disque dur du Macintosh.  
4
Ouvrez le dossier FreeMIDI Applications à l'emplacement où vous avez  
installé FreeMIDI, puis cliquez deux fois sur l'icône FreeMIDI Setup pour  
démarrer la configuration.  
rien d'anormal.  
5
Quand le message suivant apparaît : “OMS is installed on this  
computer...”, cliquez sur [FreeMIDI].  
6
Au premier lancement de FreeMIDI, une boîte de dialogue “Welcome  
to FreeMIDI!” s’affiche. Cliquez sur [Continue].  
7
Quand la boîte de dialogue FreeMIDI Preferences s'affiche, cliquez sur [Cancel]  
.
8
Quand la boîte de dialogue About Quick Setup s'affiche, cliquez sur [Cancel].  
9
Dans le menu File, sélectionnez Open.  
10  
Sélectionnez PCR dans le dossier FreeMIDI Settings que vous avez copié  
à l’étape 3, puis cliquez sur [Open].  
11  
Vérifiez que l'envoi et la réception MIDI fonctionnent correctement.  
Dans le menu MIDI, choisissez Check Connections.  
7 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)  
fig.3-13_40  
12  
Si un module de sons est branché  
en sortie MIDI OUT du PCR-30/  
50/ 80, cliquer sur l'icône de prise  
MIDI du schéma de droite  
produira un son: les réglages  
sont alors corrects.  
Pour plus d'informations  
sur la connexion d'un  
module de sons MIDI,  
reportez-vous à la  
documentation de votre  
module de sons MIDI.  
13  
14  
Choisissez à nouveau la commande MIDI Check Connections pour  
terminer le test.  
Dans le menu File, choisissez Quit pour quitter FreeMIDI Setup.  
La connexion du PCR-30/ 50/ 80 au Macintosh, l’installation du pilote MIDI  
ainsi que sa configuration sont terminées.  
Utilisa te u rs Ma c O S X  
● Installation du pilote  
1
Déconnectez tous les câbles USB à l’exception de ceux de votre clavier et de  
votre souris, et redémarrez votre Macintosh.  
2
Munissez-vous du CD-ROM.  
Introduisez-le dans le lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur.  
3
Dans le dossier Driver (Mac OS X) du CD-ROM, cliquez deux fois sur  
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.  
Dans Mac OS X v10.1.5, cliquez sur le symbole du verrou pour vous  
identifier.  
4
Dans la boîte de dialogue d'identification, entrez le mot de passe et cliquez  
sur [OK].  
7 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)  
5
L’indication “Welcome to the EDIROL PCR USB Driver Installation”  
s'affiche.  
Cliquez sur [Continue].  
6
“Important message” s'affiche.  
Lisez les informations, puis cliquez sur [Continue].  
7
“Select the location for installation” s’affiche.  
Cliquez sur le lecteur dans lequel le système est installé pour le sélectionner,  
puis cliquez sur [Continue].  
8
“Easy Installation” s'affiche.  
Cliquez sur [Install] ou sur [Upgrade].  
9
Le message “When you install this software, you must restart your  
computer after the installation is complete” s’affiche (“Vous devez  
redémarrer votre ordinateur une fois l’installation terminée”).  
Cliquez sur [Continue installation].  
10  
“The software was successfully installed” s'affiche (“Le logiciel a été  
installé avec succès”).  
Cliquez sur [Restart] pour redémarrer votre ordinateur.  
Précautions à prendre lors de l’utilisation de PCR  
Avant d’utiliser votre logiciel séquenceur, tenez compte des  
points suivants.  
* Branchez le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur avec un câble USB avant de lancer tout  
logiciel audio.  
* Ne débranchez pas le câble USB du PCR-30/50/80 pendant que le logiciel est actif.  
* Débranchez le câble USB du PCR-30/50/80 uniquement après avoir quitté votre logiciel.  
* Laissez la fonction Veille de votre Macintosh désactivée.  
* Le PCR-30/50/80 ne fonctionne pas dans l’environnement Classic de Mac OS X. Utilisez  
le PCR lorsque cet environnement est inactif.  
7 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation et configuration du pilote (Macintosh)  
● Réglage du pilote  
1
Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre ordinateur.  
1 . L’interrupteur d’alimentation sur OFF, branchez le cordon secteur sur  
le PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Branchez le cordon secteur sur une prise électrique (secteur).  
3 . Utilisez le câble USB pour brancher le PCR-30/50/80 à votre  
ordinateur.  
2
3
Placez l’interrupteur d’alimentation du PCR-30/ 50/ 80 sur ON.  
Pour plus de détails  
Procédez aux réglages MIDI du périphérique dans votre séquenceur logiciel.  
Pour plus de détails sur le périphérique MIDI OUT/IN à sélectionner,  
reportez-vous à la section “About the ports when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
sur les réglages MIDI,  
reportez-vous au manuel  
de l'application utilisée.  
La connexion du PCR-30/ 50/ 80 au Macintosh, l’installation du pilote MIDI  
ainsi que sa configuration sont terminées.  
7 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In sta lla zio n e e co n fig u ra zio n e  
d e l d rive r (W in d o w s)  
In sta lla zio n e d e l d rive r  
La procedura d’installazione dipenderà dal sistema utilizzato.  
Passare ad una delle sezioni seguenti a seconda del sistema utilizzato.  
•
•
•
Utenti Windows XP ............................................. (pag. 74)  
Utenti Windows 2000........................................... (pag. 78)  
Utenti Windows Me/ 98 ...................................... (pag. 81)  
● Utenti Windows XP  
Se si utilizza Windows XP  
Professional, è necessario  
collegarsi come un nome  
utente dotato di privilegi  
amministrativi, ad  
1
Dopo aver scollegato il PCR-30/ 50/ 80 , avviare Windows.  
Scollegare tutti i cavi USB, ad eccezione della tastiera e del mouse USB,  
se utilizzati.  
esempio come Admini-  
strator. Per maggiori infor-  
mazioni sugli account  
degli utenti, contattare  
l’amministratore del  
sistema.  
2
Aprire la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.  
1 . In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare  
Pannello di controllo  
.
2 . In “Scegliere una categoria”, fare clic su “Prestazioni e manutenzione”  
.
3 . In “o un’icona del Pannello di controllo”, fare clic sull’icona Sistema  
.
A seconda di come il  
sistema è configurato,  
l’icona Sistema potrebbe  
essere visualizzata  
fig.2-1  
3
Fare clic sulla scheda Hardware  
e poi sul pulsante [Firma driver].  
direttamente nel Pannello  
di controllo (visualizza-  
zione classica). In tal caso  
fare doppio clic sull'icona  
Sistema.  
Aprire la finestra di dialogo  
Opzioni firma driver.  
4
Accertarsi che “Scegliere una  
delle seguenti opzioni” sia  
impostato su “Ignora”  
Se al passo 4 il parametro  
“Scegliere una delle  
Se è attivata l’opzione “Ignora”  
fare clic su [OK].  
seguenti impostazioni”  
è stato modificato, dopo  
aver installato il driver  
è necessario ripristinare  
l’impostazione d’origine.  
Se non è impostata su “Ignora”  
prendere nota dell’impostazione  
corrente (di avviso o di blocco).  
Modificare quindi l’impostazione  
su “Ignora” e fare clic su [OK]  
7 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
5
6
Fare clic su [OK] per chiudere la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.  
Chiudere tutti i programmi in corso di esecuzione.  
Chiudere anche le altre finestre aperte. Se si utilizza un programma antivirus  
o simile, accertarsi che sia anch’esso chiuso.  
7
8
Preparare il CD-ROM.  
Inserire il CD nell’unità CD-ROM del computer.  
Fare clic sul pulsante Start di Windows. Nel menu visualizzato, selezionare  
“Esegui”.  
Aprire la finestra di dialogo “Esegui...”.  
fig.2-3_30  
9
Nella finestra di dialogo che  
appare, immettere quanto segue  
nel campo “Apri” e fare clic  
su [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema  
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.  
Una volta terminati  
i collegamenti, accendere  
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine  
indicato. Se i dispositivi  
vengono accesi nell’ordine  
sbagliato, si rischia di  
provocare malfunzio-  
namenti e/ o danni ai  
diffusori e agli altri  
10  
Appare la finestra di dialogo SetupInf.  
È ora possibile installare il driver.  
11  
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
1 . Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare  
l’adattatore AC al PCR-30/50/80.  
dispositivi.  
2 . Collegare l’adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.  
3 . Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
Questo apparecchio  
12  
è provvisto di un circuito  
di protezione. È necessario  
aspettare qualche secondo  
dopo l’accensione prima  
che l’apparecchio funzioni  
normalmente.  
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione del PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in posizione ON.  
Nella barra delle applicazioni verrà visualizzato il messaggio “Trovato  
nuovo hardware”. Attendere qualche minuto.  
7 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
13  
Verrà visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Installazione guidata nuovo  
hardware.  
Accertarsi che sullo schermo compaia “EDIROL PCR”, selezionare  
“Installa da un elenco o percorso specifico (per utenti esperti)”  
e fare clic su [Avanti].  
fig.2-7  
14  
La finestra visualizzerà il  
seguente messaggio  
“Selezionare le opzioni di  
ricerca e di installazione”.  
Selezionare “Non effettuare  
la ricerca. La scelta del driver  
da installare verrà effettuata  
manualmente”, e fare clic  
su [Avanti].  
15  
Accertarsi che il campo “Modello” visualizzi “EDIROL PCR” e fare clic  
su [Avanti]. La procedura di installazione del driver verrà avviata.  
Se l’impostazione “Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni” non è stata impostata su  
“Ignora” comparirà il messaggio “Installazione guidata hardware”.  
Se “Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni” è impostato su “Avvisa”  
1 . Fare clic su [Continuare].  
2 . Continuare l’installazione.  
Se “Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni” è impostato su “Blocca”  
1 . Fare clic su [OK].  
2 . Quando appare la finestra “Installazione guidata nuovo hardware”, fare clic su [Fine].  
3 . Eseguire l’installazione come descritto nella sezione “Troubleshooting”, Device Manager  
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (pag. 172).  
fig.2-9_30  
16  
Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Inserisci disco  
Viene visualizzata la  
finestra di dialogo Inserire  
il disco. In questo caso  
passare al passo 17.  
Fare clic su [OK].  
17  
Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Richiesta file  
Immettere quanto segue nel campo “Copia file da” e fare clic su [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K  
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema  
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.  
7 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
18  
19  
Verrà visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Installazione guidata nuovo  
hardware.  
Accertarsi che sullo schermo sia visualizzato “EDIROL PCR”, e fare clic  
su [Fine].  
Attendere fino a quando nella barra delle applicazioni non appare il  
messaggio “Trovato nuovo hardware”.  
Alla fine dell’installazione del driver, comparirà la finestra di dialogo  
Modifica impostazioni di sistema.  
Fare clic su [Sì]. Windows verrà riavviato automaticamente.  
Se è stato modificato il parametro “Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni”  
Se l’impostazione Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni è stata modificata, ripristinare  
il parametro d’origine dopo aver riavviato Windows.  
1 . Se si utilizza Windows XP Professional, collegarsi con un nome utente dotato  
di privilegi di tipo amministrativo (ad esempio Administrator).  
2 . In Windows, fare clic sul menu Start e nel menu selezionare Pannello di controllo.  
3 . In “Scegliere una categoria”, fare clic su “Prestazioni e manutenzione”.  
4 . In “o un’icona del Pannello di controllo”, fare clic sull’icona Sistema. Viene  
visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.  
* A seconda di come il sistema è configurato, l’icona Sistema potrebbe essere visualizzata direttamente  
nel Pannello di controllo (visualizzazione classica). In tal caso fare doppio clic sull' icona Sistema.  
5 . Fare clic sulla scheda Hardware e poi sul pulsante [Firma driver]. Verrà visualizzata  
la finestra di dialogo Opzioni firma driver.  
6 . Ripristinare l’impostazione Scegliere una delle seguenti opzioni al valore d’origine  
(di avviso o di blocco) e fare clic su [OK].  
7 . Fare clic su [OK]. La finestra di dialogo Proprietà di sistema si chiude.  
Successivamente sarà necessario configurare il driver.  
(● Destinazioni input e output MIDI (pag. 83))  
7 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
● Utenti Windows 2000  
1
Dopo aver scollegato il PCR-30/ 50/ 80 , avviare Windows.  
Scollegare tutti i cavi USB, ad eccezione della tastiera e del mouse USB,  
se utilizzati.  
2
Collegarsi a Windows con i privilegi di un amministratore, ad esempio  
come Administrator.  
3
Aprire la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.  
In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare Impostazioni  
| Pannello di controllo. Nel Pannello di controllo, fare doppio clic  
sull'icona Sistema.  
fig.2-12  
4
Fare clic sulla scheda Hardware  
e poi sul pulsante [Firma driver].  
Aprire la finestra di dialogo  
Opzioni firma driver.  
5
Accertarsi che “Verifica firma  
file” sia impostato su “Ignora”.  
Se è attivata l’opzione “Ignora”  
fare clic su [OK].  
Se “Verifica firma file”  
è stato modificato al  
passo 5, si dovrà  
Se non è impostata su “Ignora”  
prendere nota dell’impostazione  
corrente (di avviso o di blocco).  
Modificare quindi l’impostazione  
su “Ignora” e fare clic su [OK]  
ripristinare l’imposta-  
zione d’origine dopo  
aver installato il driver.  
6
Chiudere la finestra di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.  
Fare clic su [OK].  
7
Chiudere tutti i programmi in corso di esecuzione.  
Chiudere anche le altre finestre aperte. Se si utilizza un programma antivirus  
o simile, accertarsi che sia anch’esso chiuso.  
8
Preparare il CD-ROM.  
Inserire il CD nell’unità CD-ROM del computer.  
7 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
9
Fare clic sul pulsante Start di Windows. Nel menu visualizzato,  
selezionare “Esegui”.  
Aprire la finestra di dialogo “Esegui...”.  
fig.2-14_40  
10  
Nella finestra di dialogo che  
appare, immettere quanto segue  
nel campo “Apri” e fare clic  
su [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema  
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.  
Una volta terminati  
i collegamenti, accendere  
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine  
indicato. Se i dispositivi  
vengono accesi nell’ordine  
sbagliato, si rischia di  
provocare malfunziona-  
menti e/ o danni ai  
11  
Appare la finestra di dialogo SetupInf.  
È ora possibile installare il driver.  
12  
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
diffusori e agli altri  
1 . Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare  
dispositivi.  
l’adattatore AC al PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Collegare l’adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.  
Questo apparecchio  
3 . Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
è provvisto di un circuito  
di protezione. È necessario  
aspettare qualche secondo  
dopo l’accensione prima  
che l’apparecchio funzioni  
normalmente.  
13  
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione del PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in posizione ON.  
Se l’impostazione “Verifica firma file” non è stata impostata su “Ignora”, verrà visualizzato  
il messaggio “Firma digitale non trovata”.  
Se “Verifica firma digitale” è “impostato su Avvisa”,  
1 . Fare clic su [Sì].  
2 . Continuare l’installazione.  
Se “Verifica firma digitale” è “impostato su Blocca”,  
1 . Fare clic su [OK].  
2 . Quando appare la finestra “Installazione guidata nuovo hardware”, fare clic su [Fine].  
3 . Eseguire l’installazione come descritto nella sezione “Troubleshooting”, Device Manager  
shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (pag. 172).  
7 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
14  
Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Inserisci disco  
Se la finestra di dialogo  
Inserire il disco non  
appare, leggere la sezione  
The “Insert Disk” dialog  
box does not appear  
(pag. 171).  
Fare clic su [OK].  
15  
Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Richiesta file  
Immettere quanto segue nel campo “Copia file da” e fare clic su [OK].  
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K  
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema  
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.  
16  
Potrebbe essere visualizzata la finestra di dialogo “Installazione guidata  
nuovo hardware”.  
Accertarsi che “EDIROL PCR” sia visualizzato e fare clic su [Fine].  
17  
Viene visualizzata la finestra di dialogo Modifica impostazioni di sistema.  
Fare clic su [Sì]. Windows verrà riavviato automaticamente.  
Se è stata modificata l’impostazione “Verifica firma file”  
Se l’impostazione “Verifica firma file” è stata cambiata, ripristinare l’impostazione d’origine  
dopo aver riavviato Windows.  
1 . Dopo aver riavviato Windows, collegarsi a Windows come un utente dotato  
di privilegi di amministrazione, ad esempio come Administrator.  
2 . Sul desktop di Windows, fare clic con il pulsante destro del mouse su Risorse del  
computer e nel menu visualizzato selezionare Proprietà. Viene visualizzata la finestra  
di dialogo Proprietà del sistema.  
3 . Fare clic sulla scheda Hardware e poi sul pulsante [Firma driver]. Verrà visualizzata  
la finestra di dialogo Opzioni firma driver.  
4 . Ripristinare l’impostazione “Verifica firma file” al valore d’origine(“Avvisa” o “Blocca”),  
e fare clic su [OK].  
5 . Fare clic su [OK]. La finestra di dialogo Proprietà di sistema si chiude.  
Successivamente sarà necessario configurare il driver.)  
(● Destinazioni input e output MIDI (pag. 83))  
8 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
● Utenti Windows Me/98  
1
Dopo aver scollegato il PCR-30/ 50/ 80 , avviare Windows.  
Scollegare tutti i cavi USB, ad eccezione della tastiera e del mouse USB,  
se utilizzati.  
2
Chiudere tutti i programmi in corso di esecuzione.  
Chiudere anche le altre finestre aperte. Se si utilizza un programma antivirus  
o simile, accertarsi che sia anch’esso chiuso.  
3
4
Preparare il CD-ROM.  
Inserire il CD nell’unità CD-ROM del computer.  
Fare clic sul pulsante Start di Windows. Nel menu visualizzato, selezionare  
“Esegui”.  
Aprire la finestra di dialogo “Esegui...”.  
fig.2-19a_30  
5
Nella finestra di dialogo che  
appare, immettere quanto  
segue nel campo “Apri” e fare  
clic su [OK].  
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE  
* L’identificativo dell’unità “D:” potrebbe essere diverso da quello del sistema  
utilizzato. In questo caso specificare il nome dell’unità CD-ROM utilizzata.  
6
Appare la finestra di dialogo SetupInf.  
È ora possibile installare il driver.  
8 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
7
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
Una volta terminati  
1 . Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare  
i collegamenti, accendere  
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine  
indicato. Se i dispositivi  
vengono accesi nell’ordine  
sbagliato, si rischia di  
l’adattatore AC al PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Collegare l’adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.  
3 . Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare il PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
provocare malfunziona-  
menti e/ o danni ai diffusori  
e agli altri dispositivi.  
8
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione del PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in posizione ON.  
Questo apparecchio  
9
Il driver verrà installato automaticamente.  
è provvisto di un circuito  
di protezione. È necessario  
aspettare qualche secondo  
dopo l’accensione prima  
che l’apparecchio funzioni  
normalmente.  
10  
Nella finestra di dialogo, fare clic su [OK].  
* Se appare un messaggio che invita a riavviare Windows, riavviarlo come consigliato.  
Successivamente sarà necessario configurare il driver.  
(● Destinazioni input e output MIDI (pag. 83))  
8 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
Im p o sta zio n i  
● Destinazioni input e output MIDI  
Utenti Windows XP/2000/Me  
1
Aprire il Pannello di controllo.  
In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare Impostazioni  
| Pannello di controllo.  
Windows XP  
In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare Pannello  
A seconda di come  
di controllo.  
il sistema è configurato,  
l’icona Suoni e perife-  
riche audio potrebbe  
essere visualizzata diret-  
tamente nel Pannello di  
controllo (visualizzazione  
classica). In tal caso fare  
doppio clic sull'icona  
Suoni e periferiche  
audio.  
2
Aprire la finestra di dialogo Proprietà – Suoni e periferiche audio (oppure  
in Windows 2000/ Me, Proprietà – Suoni e multimedia ).  
Windows XP  
In “Scegliere una categoria”, fare clic su “Suoni, voce e periferiche  
audio”. Successivamente in “o un’icona del Pannello di controllo”, fare  
clic sull’icona Suoni e periferiche audio.  
Windows 2000/Me  
Nel Pannello di controllo, fare doppio clic sull’icona Suoni e  
multimedia per aprire la finestra “Proprietà suoni e multimedia”.  
3
Fare clic sulla scheda Audio.  
fig.2-28_30  
Selezionare la periferica  
MIDI opportuna per il  
sistema utilizzato. Non  
è necessario selezionare  
obbligatoriamente  
4
Per Riproduzione musica MIDI, fare clic  
su ● a destra di [Periferica predefinita]  
(oppure in Windows 2000/ Me,  
[Periferica preferenziale]) e selezionare  
la periferica MIDI nell’elenco  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
visualizzato.  
Per maggiori informa-  
zioni sulla porta, fare  
riferimento alla sezione.  
“About the ports  
Per utilizzare Windows Media Player per  
riprodurre un modulo sonoro collegato  
al connettore MIDI OUT del PCR,  
selezionare EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
when using a USB  
connection” (pag. 159).  
5
Chiudere la finestra di dialogo Proprietà – Suoni e periferiche audio.  
Fare clic su OK per completare le impostazioni.  
8 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Windows)  
6
Configurare la periferica MIDI sul sofware sequencer. Per maggiori  
Per maggiori informazioni  
sulle impostazioni della  
periferica MIDI, fare  
informazioni sulla periferica MIDI OUT/IN da selezionare, fare riferimento  
alla sezione About the ports when using a USB connection (pag. 159).  
riferimento al manuale  
del software utilizzato.  
La procedura di configurazione del driver è giunta al termine.  
Utenti Windows 98  
1
Aprire il Pannello di controllo.  
In Windows, fare clic sul pulsante Start e nel menu selezionare Impostazioni  
| Pannello di controllo.  
2
Aprire la finestra di dialogo Proprietà multimediali.  
Nel Pannello di controllo, fare doppio clic sull’icona Multimedia per aprire  
la finestra Proprietà multimediali.  
fig.2-29_30  
Selezionare la periferica  
MIDI opportuna per il  
sistema utilizzato. Non  
è necessario selezionare  
obbligatoriamente  
3
Fare clic sulla scheda MIDI.  
4
Impostare l’“Uscita MIDI”.  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
Selezionare [Strumento singolo]  
e scegliere la periferica MIDI  
nell’elenco visualizzato.  
Per maggiori informa-  
zioni sulla porta, fare  
riferimento alla sezione  
“About the ports  
Per utilizzare Windows Media Player  
per riprodurre un modulo sonoro  
collegato al connettore MIDI OUT  
del PCR, selezionare EDIROL  
PCR MIDI OUT.  
when using a USB  
connection” (pag. 159).  
5
Chiudere la finestra di dialogo Proprietà multimediali.  
Fare clic su OK per completare le impostazioni.  
Per maggiori informazioni  
sulle impostazioni della  
periferica MIDI, fare  
6
Configurare la periferica MIDI sul sofware sequencer. Per maggiori  
riferimento al manuale  
del software utilizzato.  
informazioni sulla periferica MIDI OUT/IN da selezionare, fare riferimento  
alla sezione “About the ports when using a USB connection” (pag. 159).  
La procedura di configurazione del driver è giunta al termine.  
8 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In sta lla zio n e e co n fig u ra zio n e  
d e l d rive r (Ma cin to sh )  
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.  
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.  
•
•
Mac OS 9/ 8 users ................................................. (pag. 85)  
Mac OS X users ..................................................... (pag. 91)  
Ute n ti Ma c O S 9 / 8  
● Installazione del driver  
Utilizzare come driver MIDI OMS o FreeMIDI.  
Il driver PCR-30/50/80 è un modulo aggiuntivo che permette di utilizzare  
l’SD-80 con OM0 o FreeMIDI.  
L’applicazione OMS si  
trova nella cartella OMS  
2.3.8 E all’interno della  
cartella OMS del CD-ROM.  
Per avere maggiori  
* Sul Macintosh deve essere stato installato OMS o FreeMIDI a seconda del software  
sequencer utilizzato.  
informazioni sul software  
OMS, consultare il file  
OMS_2.3_Mac.pdf  
(manuale in linea) che si  
trova nella cartella OMS  
2.3.8E all’interno della  
cartella OMS sul CD-ROM.  
Seguire la procedura sotto indicata per installare il driver PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
* Scollegare l’PCR-30/50/80 dal Macintosh prima di eseguire l’installazione  
Se l’PCR-30/ 50/ 80 è acceso, comparirà un messaggio, come quello sotto illustrato, quando  
viene avviato il Macintosh. Seguire una delle procedure sotto indicate a seconda del  
messaggio visualizzato.  
Se appare il seguente messaggio:  
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for driver on  
the Internet?”  
● fare clic su [Cancel].  
Se appare il seguente messaggio:  
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please refer to  
the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”  
● fare clic su [OK].  
8 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)  
1
Chiudere tutti i programmi in corso di esecuzione.  
Se si utilizza un programma antivirus o simili, accertarsi che sia  
anch’esso chiuso.  
2
Preparare il CD-ROM.  
Inserire il CD-ROM nell’unità CD-ROM.  
3
Fare doppio clic sull’icona PCR Driver-E Installer, che si trova nella cartella  
Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) del CD-ROM, per avviare il programma  
d’installazione.  
4
Controllare la destinazione dell'installazione e fare clic su [Install].  
fig.3-2_40  
5
Se appare un messaggio come  
quello sotto indicato, fare clic  
su [Continue].  
Le applicazioni in corso di  
esecuzione verranno chiuse  
e l’installazione proseguirà.  
6
Verrà visualizzata una finestra di dialogo indicante Installation completed.  
Fare clic su [Restart] per riavviare il Macintosh.  
● Impostazioni  
Impostazioni OMS  
Una volta terminati  
i collegamenti, accendere  
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine  
indicato. Se i dispositivi  
vengono accesi nell’ordine  
sbagliato, si rischia di  
provocare malfunziona-  
menti e/ o danni ai  
1
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare l’PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
1 . Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare  
il adattatore AC all’PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Collegare il adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.  
3 . Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare l’PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
diffusori e agli altri  
dispositivi.  
8 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)  
2
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione dell’PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in posizione ON.  
fig.3-3  
fig.3-3  
Prima di accendere gli  
apparecchi, accertarsi che  
il livello del volume sia  
al minimo. Si potrebbero  
sentire comunque dei  
suoni all’accensione, anche  
se il volume è al minimo;  
è normale e non c’è motivo  
di preoccuparsi.  
3
Dal CD-ROM, selezionare e trascinare la cartella  
Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - OMS Setting sul disco fisso del  
Macintosh per copiarvela.  
fig.3-4  
4
Nella cartella Opcode-OMS Application dove è stato  
installato OMS, fare doppio clic su OMS Setup  
per avviarlo.  
fig.3-5_35  
5
Se compare una finestra di dialogo  
come quella illustrata, fare clic su  
[Turn It Off]. Verrà visualizzata  
una finestra di dialogo di conferma;  
fare clic su [OK].  
Si consiglia di disattivare  
AppleTalk selezionando  
Chooser nel menu Apple.  
fig.3-6_35  
6
Verrà visualizzata la finestra  
di dialogo “Create a New Studio  
Setup”. Fare clic su [Cancel].  
Se è stato selezionato  
accidentalmente il pulsante [OK],  
fare clic su [Cancel] nella finestra  
successiva.  
fig.3-8_35  
7
Selezionare “Open” nel menu File.  
Nella cartella Settings copiata  
al passo 3, selezionare il file  
PCR e fare clic su [Open].  
Verrà visualizzata una finestra di  
dialogo simile a quella illustrata.  
8 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)  
fig.3-9_35  
8
Nel menu Edit selezionare  
OMS MIDI Setup.  
Nella finestra di dialogo OMS MIDI  
Setup visualizzata, selezionare  
Run MIDI in background e fare  
clic su [OK].  
fig.3-10  
9
Nel menu File selezionare  
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.  
Make Current.  
Se non è possibile selezionare Make  
Current, vuol dire che è stata già  
attivata e si può quindi passare  
all’operazione successiva.  
10  
Accertarsi che la trasmissione e la ricezione MIDI siano corrette. Nel menu  
Studio selezionare Test Studio.  
fig.3-22_50  
11  
Prova a suonare la tastiera  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80. Se la freccia sotto  
al numero 2 o al numero 3  
lampeggia (vedi diagramma  
a destra), le impostazioni sono  
state eseguite correttamente.  
Spostando il cursore del mouse  
vicino all’icona ꢀ del connettore  
Si consiglia di disattivare  
AppleTalPer maggiori  
informazioni sul collega-  
mento del modulo sonoro  
MIDI, fare riferimento  
al manuale utente del  
modulo sonoro MIDI.  
MIDI, il puntatore cambierà forma  
in quella di una nota musicale.  
Se un modulo sonoro MIDI è  
collegato alla presa MIDI OUT della tastiera PCR-30/ 50/ 80, fai click  
sull’icona del connettore MIDI che appare nel diagramma a destra. Se viene  
generato un suono, le impostazioni sono state eseguite correttamente.  
8 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)  
12  
Chiudere OMS Setup.  
Nel menu File selezionare [Exit]. Se appare la finestra di dialogo di conferma  
AppleTalk confirmation, fare clic su [OK] per chiuderla.  
La procedura di collegamento dell’PCR-30/ 50/ 80 al Macintosh,  
di installazione del driver MIDI e di configurazione del driver è giunta  
al termine.  
● Impostazioni FreeMIDI  
Una volta terminati  
i collegamenti, accendere  
i vari dispositivi nell’ordine  
indicato. Se i dispositivi  
vengono accesi nell’ordine  
sbagliato, si rischia di  
provocare malfunziona-  
menti e/ o danni ai  
1
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare l’PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
1 . Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare  
il adattatore AC all’PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Collegare il adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.  
diffusori e agli altri  
3 . Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare l’PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
dispositivi.  
2
3
4
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione dell’PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in posizione ON.  
Dal CD-ROM, copiare la cartella Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) – FreeMIDI Setting  
Prima di accendere gli  
apparecchi, accertarsi che  
il livello del volume sia  
al minimo. Si potrebbero  
sentire comunque dei  
suoni all’accensione, anche  
se il volume è al minimo;  
è normale e non c’è motivo  
di preoccuparsi.  
sul disco fisso del Macintosh.  
Aprire la cartella FreeMIDI Applications dove è stata eseguita l’installazione  
FreeMIDI e fare doppio clic sull’icona FreeMIDI Setup per avviare  
l’applicazione.  
5
6
Quando appare il messaggio “OMS is installed on this computer...”, fare  
clic su [FreeMIDI].  
Al primo avvio di FreeMIDI, comparirà la finestra di dialogo “Welcome  
to FreeMIDI!”. Fare clic su [Continue].  
7
8
9
Nella finestra di dialogo FreeMIDI Preferences, fare clic su [Cancel].  
Nella finestra di dialogo About Quick Setup, fare clic su [Cancel].  
Nel menu File selezionare Open.  
8 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)  
10  
Selezionare PCR nella cartella FreeMIDI Setting copiata al passo 3 e fare  
clic su [Open].  
11  
Controllare che l’invio e la ricezione MIDI siano corrette.  
Nel menu MIDI selezionare Check Connections.  
fig.3-13_40  
12  
Se un modulo sonoro MIDI è  
Si consiglia di disattivare  
AppleTalPer maggiori  
informazioni sul collega-  
mento del modulo sonoro  
MIDI, fare riferimento  
al manuale utente del  
modulo sonoro MIDI.  
collegato alla presa MIDI OUT  
della tastiera PCR-30/ 50/ 80, fai  
click sull’icona del connettore MIDI  
che appare nel diagramma a destra.  
Se viene generato un suono, le  
impostazioni sono state eseguite  
correttamente.  
13  
Scegliere di nuovo il comando Check Connections nel menu MIDI per  
concludere il test.  
14  
Nel menu File, scegliere Quit per uscire da FreeMIDI Setup.  
La procedura di collegamento dell’PCR-30/ 50/ 80 al Macintosh,  
di installazione del driver MIDI e di configurazione del driver è giunta  
al termine.  
9 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)  
Ute n ti Ma c O S X  
● Installazione del driver  
1
Scollegare tutti i cavi USB a parte quelli della tastiera e del mouse e riavviare  
il Macintosh.  
2
3
Preparare il CD-ROM.  
Inserire il CD nell’unità CD-ROM del computer.  
Nella cartella Driver (Mac OS X) del CD-ROM, fare doppio clic su  
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.  
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, fare clic sul simbolo del lucchetto per l'autentificazione.  
4
5
Nella finestra di dialogo authentication, immettere la password e fare clic  
su [OK].  
Sullo schermo comparirà il seguente messaggio “Welcome to the EDIROL  
PCR USB Driver installation”.  
Fare clic su [Continue].  
6
7
Verrà visualizzato il seguente messaggio “Important message”.  
Controllare il contenuto della finestra e fare clic su [Continue].  
Sullo schermo comparirà il messaggio “Select the location for  
installation”.  
Selezionare l'unità dove è installato il sistema e fare clic su [Continue].  
8
9
Verrà visualizzato il seguente messaggio “Easy installation”.  
Fare clic su Install o Upgrade.  
Sullo schermo comparirà il seguente messaggio “When you install this  
software, you must restart your computer after the installation is  
complete”.  
Fare clic su [Continue installation].  
10  
Verrà visualizzato il seguente messaggio “The software was successfully  
installed”.  
Fare clic su [Restart] per riavviare il Macintosh.  
9 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)  
Precauzioni da rispettare quando si utilizza la tastiera PCR  
Prima di utilizzare il software sequencer, tenere presente i seguenti punti.  
* Collegare la tastiera PCR-30/50/80 al computer mediante il cavo USB prima di avviare il software  
sequencer o altri programmi.  
* Non scollegare il cavo USB dalla tastiera PCR-30/50/80 mentre è in esecuzione il software sequencer o un  
altro programma.  
* Scollegare il cavo USB dalla tastiera PCR-30/50/80 solo dopo aver chiuso il sequencer o qualsiasi altro  
programma utilizzato.  
* Non attivare la funzione Sleep del Macintosh.  
* La tastiera PCR-30/50/80 non funziona nella configurazione Classic di Mac OS X. Utilizzare la tastiera  
PCR quando la configurazione Classic non è in esecuzione.  
9 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installazione e configurazione del driver (Macintosh)  
● Configurazione del driver  
1
Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare la tastiera PCR-30/50/80 al computer.  
1 . Dopo aver spostato l’interruttore di alimentazione su OFF, collegare  
l’adattatore AC alla tastiera PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Collegare l’adattatore AC a una presa elettrica.  
3 . Utilizzare il cavo USB per collegare la tastiera PCR-30/50/80  
al computer.  
2
3
Spostare l’interruttore di alimentazione della tastiera PCR-30/ 50/ 80 in  
posizione ON.  
Per maggiori informazioni  
sulle impostazioni della  
periferica MIDI, fare  
Configurare la periferica MIDI sul sofware sequencer. Per maggiori  
informazioni sulla periferica MIDI OUT/IN da selezionare, fare riferimento  
alla sezione “About the ports when using a USB connection”(pag.159).  
riferimento al manuale  
del software utilizzato.  
La procedura di collegamento della tastiera PCR-30/ 50/ 80 al Macintosh,  
di installazione del driver MIDI e di configurazione del driver è giunta  
al termine.  
9 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In sta la ció n y co n fig u ra ció n d e l  
co n tro la d o r (W in d o w s)  
In sta la ció n d e l co n tro la d o r  
El procedimiento de instalación variará en función del sistema.  
Pase a uno de los siguientes apartados, en función del sistema que utilice.  
•
•
•
Usuarios de Windows XP ................................... (pág. 94)  
Usuarios de Windows 2000 ................................ (pág. 98)  
Usuarios de Windows Me/ 98 ............................ (pág. 101)  
● Usuarios de Windows XP  
Si es usuario de  
Windows XP Professional,  
deberá iniciar la sesión  
con un nombre de usuario  
con algún tipo de cuenta  
de administración (por  
ejemplo, Administrador).  
Para obtener información  
detallada acerca de las  
cuentas de usuario,  
1
Con la unidad PCR-30/ 50/ 80 desconectada, inicie Windows.  
Desconecte todos los cables USB excepto el del teclado USB y el ratón USB  
(si se utilizan).  
2
Abra el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.  
1 . Haga clic en el menú Inicio de Windows y seleccione Panel de control  
.
consulte al administrador  
de sistemas de su PC.  
2 . En “Elija una categoría”, haga clic en “Rendimiento y mantenimiento”  
.
3 . En “o elija un icono del Panel de control”, haga clic en el icono Sistema  
.
fig.2-1  
En función de cómo tenga  
configurado el sistema,  
puede que el icono  
3
Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y,  
a continuación, en [Firma del  
controlador].  
Sistema aparezca  
directamente en el Panel  
de control (en la vista  
Clásica). En ese caso,  
haga doble clic en el  
icono Sistema.  
Abra el cuadro de diálogo  
Opciones de firma del  
controlador.  
4
Asegúrese de que “¿Qué acción  
desea que realice Windows?”  
esté establecido en “Omitir”.  
Si ha modificado “¿Qué  
acción desea que realice  
Windows?” en el paso 4,  
deberá restaurar la  
Si ya está establecido en “Omitir”,  
haga clic en [Aceptar].  
Si no está en “Omitir”, anótese  
configuración anterior  
después de instalar  
la configuración actual (“Avisar” o “Bloquear”). A continuación, cambie  
la configuración a “Omitir” y haga clic en [Aceptar].  
el controlador.  
9 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
5
6
Haga clic en [Aceptar] para cerrar el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades  
del sistema.  
Salga de todo el software que se esté ejecutando (aplicaciones).  
Cierre cualquier ventana que esté abierta. Si utiliza un programa antivirus  
o software similar, también deberá cerrarlo.  
7
8
Prepare el CD-ROM.  
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM del PC.  
Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows. En el menú que aparecerá,  
seleccione “Ejecutar...”.  
Abra el cuadro de diálogo “Ejecutar...”.  
fig.2-3_30  
9
En el cuadro de diálogo que aparece,  
escriba lo siguiente en el campo  
“Abrir” y haga clic en [Aceptar].  
D:\DRIVER\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique el nombre  
de su unidad de CD-ROM.  
Una vez completadas las  
conexiones, encienda los  
diferentes aparatos en  
el orden especificado.  
Si enciende los aparatos  
en un orden incorrecto,  
podrían producirse  
10  
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo SetupInf.  
Ahora puede instalar el controlador.  
11  
Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
anomalías en el funciona-  
miento o daños en los  
altavoces y otros aparatos.  
1 . Con el interruptor de alimentación apagado (OFF), conecte el adaptador  
de CA a la unidad PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.  
3 . Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
Esta unidad viene  
equipada con un circuito  
de protección. Es necesario  
dejar pasar un pequeño  
intervalo (unos segundos)  
después de encender la  
unidad para que ésta  
12  
Coloque el interruptor de alimentación de la unidad PCR-30/ 50/ 80 en  
la posición ON (encendido).  
Cerca de la barra de tareas, el PC indicará “Nuevo hardware encontrado”.  
Espere, por favor.  
funcione correctamente.  
9 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
13  
Aparecerá el Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado.  
Asegúrese de que la pantalla indique “EDIROL PCR”, seleccione “Instalar  
desde una lista o ubicación específica (avanzado)” y haga clic en  
[Siguiente].  
fig.2-7  
14  
La pantalla indicará “Elija sus  
opciones de búsqueda  
e instalación”.  
Seleccione “No buscar.  
Seleccionaré el controlador  
que se va a instalar” y haga  
clic en [Siguiente].  
15  
Asegúrese de que el campo “Modelo” indique “EDIROL PCR”, y haga clic  
en [Siguiente]. Entonces empezará la instalación del controlador.  
Si el valor de “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?” no se ha establecido en “Omitir”,  
aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo “Instalación de hardware”.  
Si la opción “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?” está establecida en “Avisar”:  
1 . Haga clic en [Continuar].  
2 . Prosiga con la instalación.  
Si la opción “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?” está establecida en “Avisar”:  
1 . Haga clic en [Aceptar].  
2 . Cuando aparezca “Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado”, haga clic en [Finalizar].  
3 . Efectúe la instalación tal como se describe en el apartado “Resolución de problemas” del  
apartado Device Manager shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (pág. 172).  
fig.2-9_30  
16  
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Insertar disco.  
Puede que el cuadro de  
diálogo Insertar disco no  
aparezca. En ese caso, vaya  
al paso 17.  
Haga clic en [Aceptar].  
17  
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Archivos necesarios.  
Especifique lo siguiente en el campo “Copiar archivos de” y haga clic  
en [Aceptar].  
D:\Driver\USB_XP2K  
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique  
el nombre de la unidad de CD-ROM.  
9 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
18  
19  
Aparecerá el Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado.  
Asegúrese de que la pantalla indica “EDIROL PCR” y haga clic en [Finalizar].  
Espere hasta que aparezca “Nuevo hardware encontrado” cerca de la barra  
de tareas.  
Una vez finalizada la instalación del controlador, aparecerá el cuadro  
de diálogo Cambio de configuración del sistema.  
Haga clic en [Sí]. Windows se reiniciará automáticamente.  
Si ha modificado “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?”  
Si ha modificado el valor para “¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows?” restaure la  
configuración original después de reiniciar Windows.  
1 . Si es usuario de Windows XP Professional, debe iniciar la sesión de Windows  
utilizando un nombre de usuario con algún tipo de cuenta de administración  
(Administrador, por ejemplo).  
2 . Haga clic en el menú Inicio de Windows y seleccione Panel de control.  
3 . En “Elija una categoría”, haga clic en “Rendimiento y mantenimiento”.  
4 . En “o elija un icono del Panel de control”, haga clic en el icono Sistema. Aparecerá  
el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.  
* En función de cómo tenga configurado el sistema, puede que el icono Sistema aparezca directamente  
en el Panel de control (en la vista Clásica). En ese caso, haga doble clic en el icono Sistema.  
5 . Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y, a continuación, en [Firma del controlador]. Aparecerá  
el cuadro de diálogo Opciones de firma del controlador.  
6 . Restablezca el valor de ¿Qué acción desea que realice Windows? al valor original  
(“Advertir” o “Bloquear”) y haga clic en [Aceptar].  
7 . Haga clic en [Aceptar]. El cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema se cerrará.  
A continuación, deberá configurar el controlador.  
(● Destinos de entrada y salida MIDI (pág. 103))  
9 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
● Usuarios de Windows 2000  
1
Con la unidad PCR-30/ 50/ 80 desconectada, inicie Windows.  
Desconecte todos los cables USB excepto el del teclado USB y el ratón USB  
(si se utilizan).  
2
Inicie Windows con un usuario con privilegios administrativos  
(como Administrador).  
3
Abra el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.  
Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, en el menú que aparecerá, seleccione  
Configuración | Panel de control. En Panel de control, haga doble clic  
en el icono Sistema.  
fig.2-12  
4
Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y,  
a continuación, en [Firma del  
controlador].  
Abra el cuadro de diálogo  
Opciones de firma del  
controlador.  
5
Asegúrese de establecer  
“Verificación de la firma  
Si ha cambiado el valor  
“Verificación de la firma  
del archivo” en el paso 5,  
deberá restaurar la  
de archivo” en “Omitir”.  
Si ya está establecido en “Omitir”,  
haga clic en [Aceptar].  
configuración anterior  
después de instalar  
Si no está establecido en “Omitir”,  
anote el valor actual (“Avisar” o “Bloquear”). A continuación, cambie  
la configuración a “Omitir” y haga clic en [Aceptar].  
el controlador.  
6
Cierre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.  
Haga clic en [Aceptar].  
7
Salga de todo el software que se esté ejecutando (aplicaciones).  
Cierre cualquier ventana que esté abierta. Si utiliza un programa antivirus  
o software similar, también deberá cerrarlo.  
8
Prepare el CD-ROM.  
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM del PC.  
9 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
9
Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows. En el menú que aparecerá,  
seleccione “Ejecutar...”.  
Abra el cuadro de diálogo “Ejecutar...”.  
fig.2-14_40  
10  
En el cuadro de diálogo que aparecerá,  
escriba lo siguiente en el campo  
“Abrir” y haga clic en [Aceptar].  
D:\DRIVER\USB_XP2K\SETUPINF.EXE  
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique  
el nombre de la unidad de CD-ROM.  
Una vez completadas las  
conexiones, encienda los  
diferentes aparatos en  
el orden especificado.  
Si enciende los aparatos  
en un orden incorrecto,  
podrían producirse  
11  
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo SetupInf.  
Ahora puede instalar el controlador.  
12  
Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
anomalías en el funciona-  
miento o daños en los  
altavoces y otros aparatos.  
1 . Con el interruptor de alimentación apagado (OFF), conecte el  
adaptador de CA a la unidad PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.  
Esta unidad viene  
3 . Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
equipada con un circuito  
de protección. Es necesario  
dejar pasar un pequeño  
intervalo (unos segundos)  
después de encender la  
unidad para que ésta  
13  
Coloque el interruptor de alimentación de la unidad PCR-30/ 50/ 80 en  
la posición ON (encendido).  
funcione correctamente.  
Si la configuración de “Verificación de la firma del archivo” no se ha establecido en “Omitir”,  
aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo “No se ha encontrado la firma digital”.  
Si “Verificación de la firma del archivo” está establecida en “Avisar”:  
1 . Haga clic en [Sí].  
2 . Prosiga con la instalación.  
Si “Verificación de la firma del archivo” está establecido en “Bloquear”:  
1 . Haga clic en [Aceptar].  
2 . Cuando aparezca “Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado”, haga clic en [Finalizar].  
3 . Efectúe la instalación tal como se describe en el apartado “Resolución de problemas” del apartado  
Device Manager shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device” (pág. 172).  
9 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
14  
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Insertar disco.  
Si no aparece el cuadro  
de diálogo Insertar disco,  
consulte el apartado The  
“Insert Disk” dialog box  
does not appear  
Haga clic en [Aceptar].  
15  
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Archivos necesarios.  
(pág. 171).  
Especifique lo siguiente en el campo “Copiar archivos de” y haga clic  
en [Aceptar].  
D:\Drivers\USB_XP2K  
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique  
el nombre de la unidad de CD-ROM.  
16  
Es posible que aparezca el “Asistente para hardware nuevo encontrado”.  
Compruebe que “EDIROL PCR” aparece en pantalla y haga clic en [Finalizar].  
17  
Puede que aparezca el cuadro de diálogo Cambio de configuración  
del sistema.  
Haga clic en [Sí]. Windows se reiniciará automáticamente.  
Si ha cambiado “Verificación de la firma del archivo”  
Si ha modificado el valor de “Verificación de la firma del archivo”, restaure el valor original  
después de que se reinicie Windows.  
1 . Una vez se haya reiniciado Windows, inicie la sesión de Windows como un usuario con  
privilegios de administración (como por ejemplo Administrador).  
2 . En el escritorio de Windows, haga clic con el botón secundario del ratón en el icono  
Mi PC y, en el menú que aparecerá, seleccione Propiedades. Aparecerá el cuadro  
de diálogo Propiedades del sistema.  
3 . Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y, a continuación, haga clic en [Firma del controlador].  
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo Opciones de firma del controlador.  
4 . Vuelva a establecer la configuración original de “Verificación de firma del controlador”  
(ya sea “Avisar” o “Bloquear”) y haga clic en [Aceptar].  
5 . Haga clic en [Aceptar]. El cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema se cerrará.  
A continuación, deberá configurar el controlador.  
(● Destinos de entrada y salida MIDI (pág. 103))  
1 0 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
● Usuarios de Windows Me/98  
1
Con la unidad PCR-30/ 50/ 80 desconectada, inicie Windows.  
Desconecte todos los cables USB excepto el del teclado USB y el ratón USB  
(si se utilizan).  
2
Salga de todo el software que se esté ejecutando (aplicaciones).  
Cierre cualquier ventana que esté abierta. Si utiliza un programa antivirus  
o software similar, también deberá cerrarlo.  
3
4
Prepare el CD-ROM.  
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM del PC.  
Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows. En el menú que aparecerá,  
seleccione “Ejecutar...”  
Abra el cuadro de diálogo “Ejecutar...”.  
fig.2-19a_30  
5
En el cuadro de diálogo que  
aparecerá, escriba lo siguiente  
en el campo “Abrir” y haga clic  
en [Aceptar].  
D:\Driver\USB_ME98\SETUPINF.EXE  
* El nombre de la unidad “D:” puede ser diferente para su sistema. Especifique  
el nombre de la unidad de CD-ROM.  
6
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo SetupInf.  
Ahora puede instalar el controlador.  
1 0 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
7
Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
Una vez completadas las  
conexiones, encienda los  
diferentes aparatos en el  
orden especificado. Si  
enciende los aparatos en  
un orden incorrecto,  
1 . Con el interruptor de alimentación apagado (OFF), conecte el  
adaptador de CA a la unidad PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.  
3 . Utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
podrían producirse  
anomalías en el funciona-  
miento o daños en los  
altavoces y otros aparatos.  
8
Coloque el interruptor de alimentación de la unidad PCR-30/ 50/ 80 en la  
posición ON (encendido).  
9
Esta unidad viene  
El controlador se instalará automáticamente.  
equipada con un circuito  
de protección. Es necesario  
dejar pasar un pequeño  
intervalo (unos segundos)  
después de encender la  
unidad para que ésta  
10  
En el cuadro de diálogo, haga clic en [Aceptar].  
* Si aparece un mensaje que le recomienda que reinicie Windows, reinicie el sistema  
operativo como se le indica.  
funcione correctamente.  
A continuación, deberá configurar el controlador.  
(● Destinos de entrada y salida MIDI (pág. 103))  
1 0 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
Co n fig u ra ció n  
● Destinos de entrada y salida MIDI  
Usuarios de Windows XP/2000/Me  
1
Abra el Panel de control.  
Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, en el menú que aparecerá, seleccione  
Configuración | Panel de control.  
Windows XP  
Haga clic en el botón Inicio de Windows y, en el menú que aparecerá,  
seleccione Panel de control.  
En función de cómo tenga  
configurado el sistema,  
puede que el icono  
2
Dispositivos de sonido  
y audio aparezca  
Abra el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades de sonidos y dispositivos de  
audio (o Propiedades de sonidos y multimedia, en Windows 2000 o ME).  
directamente en el Panel  
de control (en la vista  
Clásica). En ese caso,  
haga doble clic en el  
icono Dispositivos  
Windows XP  
En “Elija una categoría”, haga clic en “Dispositivos de sonido, audio  
y voz”. A continuación, en “o elija un icono del Panel de control”,  
haga clic en el icono Dispositivos de sonido y audio.  
de sonido y audio.  
Windows 2000/Me  
En Panel de control, haga doble clic en el icono Sonidos y multimedia para  
abrir el cuadro de diálogo “Propiedades de sonidos y multimedia”.  
3
Haga clic en la ficha Audio.  
fig.2-28_30  
4
Para la reproducción de música MIDI,  
haga clic en ● que aparece a la derecha  
de [Dispositivo predeterminado]  
(o [Dispositivo preferido] en Windows  
2000/ Me) y seleccione el dispositivo  
MIDI en la lista que aparece.  
Seleccione el dispositivo  
MIDI apropiado para el  
sistema. No tiene por qué  
seleccionar necesariamente  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
Para obtener más  
Para utilizar Media Player para reproducir  
el audio de un módulo de sonido  
información, consulte  
el apartado “About the  
ports when using a USB  
connection” (pág. 159).  
conectado al conector MIDI OUT del PCR,  
seleccione EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
5
Cierre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades de sonidos y dispositivos  
de audio.  
Haga clic en Aceptar para finalizar la configuración.  
1 0 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Windows)  
6
Configure el dispositivo MIDI en el software secuenciador. Para obtener  
Si desea obtener detalles  
sobre la configuración  
de dispositivos MIDI,  
consulte el manual del  
usuario que se adjunta  
con el software.  
información sobre el dispositivo MIDI OUT/IN que debe seleccionar,  
consulte el apartado About the ports when using a USB connection  
(pág. 159).  
Con esto finaliza la configuración del controlador.  
Usuarios de Windows 98  
1
Abra el Panel de control.  
Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, en el menú que aparecerá, seleccione  
Configuración | Panel de control.  
2
Abra el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades multimedia.  
En Panel de control, haga doble clic en el icono Multimedia para abrir  
el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades multimedia.  
fig.2-29_30  
3
Haga clic en la ficha MIDI.  
Seleccione el dispositivo  
MIDI apropiado para el  
sistema. No tiene por qué  
seleccionar necesariamente  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT.  
4
Especifique la “Salida de MIDI”.  
Seleccione [Instrumento único]  
y seleccione el dispositivo MIDI  
en la lista que aparece.  
Para utilizar Media Player para  
reproducir el audio de un módulo  
de sonido conectado al conector MIDI  
OUT del PCR, seleccione EDIROL  
PCR MIDI OUT.  
Para obtener más  
información, consulte  
el apartado “About the  
ports when using a USB  
connection” (pág. 159).  
5
Cierre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades multimedia.  
Si desea obtener detalles  
sobre la configuración  
de dispositivos MIDI,  
consulte el manual del  
propietario que se adjunta  
con el software que esté  
utilizando.  
Haga clic en Aceptar para finalizar la configuración.  
6
Configure el dispositivo MIDI en el software secuenciador. Para obtener  
información sobre el dispositivo MIDI OUT/IN que debe seleccionar, consulte  
el apartado “About the ports when using a USB connection” (pág. 159).  
Con esto finaliza la configuración del controlador.  
1 0 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In sta la ció n y co n fig u ra ció n  
d e l co n tro la d o r (Ma cin to sh )  
The installation procedure will differ depending on your system.  
Please proceed to one of the following sections, depending on the system you use.  
•
•
Mac OS 9/ 8 users ................................................. (pág. 105)  
Mac OS X users ..................................................... (pág. 105)  
Usu a rio s d e Ma c O S 9 / 8  
● Instalación del controlador  
Utilice OMS o FreeMIDI como controlador MIDI.  
El controlador del PCR-30/50/80 que se incluye es un módulo adicional  
para utilizar el PCR-30/ 50/ 80 con OMS o FreeMIDI.  
OMS se encuentra en  
la carpeta OMS 2.3.8 E  
dentro de la carpeta OMS  
del CD-ROM. Si desea  
obtener más información  
sobre OMS, consulte  
el manual en línea  
* Debe instalar OMS o FreeMIDI en su Macintosh, según el software secuenciador  
OMS_2.3_Mac.pdf en  
la carpeta OMS2.3.8E  
que se encuentra dentro  
de la carpeta OMS del  
CD-ROM.  
que vaya a utilizar.  
Lleve a cabo el siguiente procedimiento para instalar el controlador del  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
* Desconecte el PCR-30/50/80 del Macintosh antes de realizar la instalación.  
Si el PCR-30/ 50/ 80 está encendido, al iniciarse el Macintosh aparecerá un mensaje como el  
siguiente. Realice los pasos que se describen a continuación según el mensaje que se muestre.  
Si la pantalla indica:  
“Driver required for USB device ‘unknown device’ is not available. Search for driver  
on the Internet?”  
● Haga clic en [Cancel].  
Si la pantalla indica:  
“Software required for using device ‘unknown device’ cannot be found. Please refer  
to the manual included with the device, and install the necessary software”  
● Haga clic en [OK].  
1 0 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)  
1
Salga de todo el software que se esté ejecutando (aplicaciones).  
Si utiliza un programa antivirus o software similar, también debe cerrarlo.  
2
Prepare el CD-ROM.  
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM.  
3
Haga doble clic en el icono PCR Driver-E Installer (que se encuentra en la  
carpeta Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) del CD-ROM) para iniciar el programa de  
instalación.  
4
Verifique la ubicación de la instalación y haga clic en [Install].  
fig.3-2_40  
5
Si aparece un mensaje como el  
siguiente, haga clic en [Continue].  
Saldrá de todas las aplicaciones que  
se estén ejecutando y proseguirá  
con la instalación.  
6
Aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo que indicará Installation completed.  
Haga clic en [Restart] para reiniciar el Macintosh.  
● Configuración  
Configuración de OMS  
Establecidas las  
1
conexiones, encienda los  
diferentes dispositivos en  
el orden especificado. Si  
enciende los dispositivos  
en un orden incorrecto,  
puede causar anomalías en  
el funcionamiento o daños  
en los altavoces y otros  
aparatos.  
Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
1 . Con el interruptor de alimentación en OFF, conecte el adaptador de CA  
al PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.  
3 . Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
2
Disponga el interruptor de alimentación del PCR-30/ 50/ 80 en la  
posición ON.  
Asegúrese siempre de  
tener bajado el volumen  
antes de encender la  
fig.3-3  
unidad. Aunque tenga el  
volumen completamente  
bajado, puede que oiga  
algún sonido al encender  
la unidad, pero esto es algo  
normal y no es indicio de  
un mal funcionamiento.  
3
En el CD-ROM, arrastre la carpeta Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) -  
OMS Setting al disco duro del Macintosh para copiarla.  
1 0 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)  
fig.3-4  
4
En la carpeta Opcode-OMS Application donde  
ha instalado OMS, haga doble clic en OMS Setup  
para iniciarlo.  
fig.3-5_35  
5
Si aparece un cuadro de diálogo  
como éste, haga clic en [Turn It  
Off]. Aparecerá un cuadro de  
diálogo de confirmación; haga clic  
en [OK].  
Es conveniente desactivar  
AppleTalk, seleccionando  
Chooser en el menú  
Apple.  
fig.3-6_35  
6
Aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo  
Create a New Studio Setup.  
Haga clic en [Cancel].  
Si, por error, hace clic en [OK],  
haga clic en [Cancel] en la  
siguiente pantalla.  
fig.3-8_35  
7
Elija “Open” en el menú File.  
En la carpeta Setting que ha  
copiado en el paso 3, seleccione el  
archivo PCR y haga clic en [Open].  
Aparecerá una pantalla como ésta.  
fig.3-9_35  
8
En el menú Edit, seleccione OMS  
MIDI Setup.  
En el cuadro de diálogo OMS MIDI  
Setup que aparece, marque  
Run MIDI in background y haga  
clic en [OK].  
1 0 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)  
fig.3-10  
A diamond mark (◊) indicate in the settings are enabled.  
9
En el menú File, elija Make  
Current.  
Si no puede seleccionar Make  
Current, significa que ya se ha  
aplicado y puede continuar por  
el siguiente paso.  
10  
Compruebe que la transmisión y la recepción MIDI se realicen  
correctamente. En el menú Studio, seleccione Test Studio.  
fig.2-22_50  
11  
Pruebe de tocar el teclado del  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80. Si la flecha al lado  
del número 2 ó 3 del diagrama  
de la derecha parpadea, significa  
que los ajustes se han realizado  
correctamente. Cuando mueva  
el cursor del mouse cerca del icono  
del conector MIDI, el cursor  
Para obtener  
información sobre cómo  
conectar un módulo de  
sonido MIDI, consulte  
el manual del usuario  
de su módulo de sonido  
MIDI.  
cambiará a sostenido ꢀ (nota  
musical).  
Si un módulo de sonido MIDI se  
conecta al conector MIDI OUT del PCR-30/ 50/ 80, pulse el icono del  
conector MIDI mostrado en el diagrama de la derecha. Si escucha sonido, los  
ajustes se han realizado correctamente.  
12  
Salga de OMS Setup.  
En el menú File, elija [Exit]. Si aparece el cuadro de diálogo AppleTalk  
confirmation, haga clic en [OK] para cerrarlo.  
Con esto, habrá completado todos los pasos necesarios para conectar el  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80 al Macintosh, instalar el controlador MIDI y efectuar la  
configuración del controlador.)  
1 0 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)  
Configuración de FreeMIDI  
Establecidas las  
1
Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
conexiones, encienda los  
diferentes dispositivos en  
1 . Con el interruptor de alimentación en OFF, conecte el adaptador de CA  
el orden especificado. Si  
enciende los dispositivos  
en un orden incorrecto,  
puede causar anomalías en  
el funcionamiento o daños  
en los altavoces y otros  
aparatos.  
al PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.  
3 . Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al PC.  
2
Disponga el interruptor de alimentación del PCR-30/ 50/ 80 en la  
posición ON.  
Asegúrese siempre de  
tener bajado el volumen  
antes de encender la  
3
4
Desde el CD-ROM, copie la carpeta Driver E (Mac OS 9, 8) - FreeMIDI  
Setting en el disco duro del Macintosh.  
unidad. Aunque tenga el  
volumen completamente  
bajado, puede que oiga  
algún sonido al encender  
la unidad, pero esto es algo  
normal y no es indicio de  
un mal funcionamiento.  
Abra la carpeta FreeMIDI Applications desde la ubicación en la que ha  
instalado FreeMIDI y haga doble clic en el icono FreeMIDI Setup para iniciarlo.  
5
6
Cuando aparezca “OMS is installed on this computer...”, haga clic en [FreeMIDI]  
.
La primera vez que inicie el software, aparecerá el cuadro de diálogo  
“Welcome to FreeMIDI!”. Haga clic en [Continue].  
7
Cuando aparezca el cuadro de diálogo FreeMIDI Preferences, haga clic  
en [Cancel].  
8
Cuando aparezca el cuadro de diálogo About Quick Setup, haga clic en [Cancel]  
.
9
En el menú File, elija Open.  
10  
Seleccione PCR en la carpeta FreeMIDI Setting que ha copiado en el paso 3  
y haga clic en [Open].  
11  
Compruebe que la transmisión y la recepción MIDI se realicen correctamente.  
En el menú MIDI, seleccione Check Connections.  
1 0 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)  
fig.3-13_40  
12  
Si un módulo de sonido MIDI  
se conecta al conector MIDI OUT  
del PCR-30/ 50/ 80, pulse el icono  
del conector MIDI mostrado  
en el diagrama de la derecha.  
Si escucha sonido, los ajustes se  
han realizado correctamente.  
Para obtener  
información sobre cómo  
conectar un módulo de  
sonido MIDI, consulte  
el manual del usuario  
de su módulo de sonido  
MIDI.  
13  
Vuelva a elegir el comando Check Connections del menú MIDI para  
finalizar la prueba.  
14  
En el menú File, seleccione Quit para salir de FreeMIDI Setup.  
Con esto, habrá completado todos los pasos necesarios para conectar  
el PCR-30/ 50/ 80 al Macintosh, instalar el controlador MIDI y efectuar  
la configuración del controlador.)  
Usu a rio s d e Ma c O S X  
● Instalación del controlador  
1
Desconecte todos los cables USB que no sean del teclado o del ratón  
y reinicie el sistema Macintosh.  
2
Prepare el CD-ROM.  
Inserte el CD-ROM en la unidad de CD-ROM del sistema.  
3
En la carpeta Driver (Mac OS X) del CD-ROM, haga doble clic en  
PCRUSBDriver.pkg.  
En Mac OS X v10.1.5, haga clic en el símbolo de bloqueo para la autentificación.  
4
En el cuadro de diálogo de authentication (autentificación), escriba la  
contraseña y haga clic en [OK] (Aceptar).  
1 1 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)  
5
La pantalla indicará “Welcome to EDIROL PCR USB Driver installation”  
(Bienvenido a la instalación del controlador USB del PCR de Edirol).  
Haga clic en [Continue] (Continuar).  
6
7
La pantalla indicará “Important message” (Mensaje importante).  
Lea su contenido y haga clic en [Continue] (Continuar).  
La pantalla indicará “Select the location for installation” (Seleccione la  
ubicación de instalación).  
Seleccione la unidad en la que esté instalado el sistema operativo haciendo  
clic sobre la misma y, a continuación, haga clic en [Continue] (Continuar).  
8
9
La pantalla indicará “Easy installation” (Instalación fácil).  
Haga clic en Install (Instalar) o Upgrade (Actualizar).  
La pantalla indicará “When you install this software, you must restart  
your computer after the installation is complete” (Al instalar el software,  
debe reiniciar el sistema una vez finalizada la instalación).  
Haga clic en [Continue installation] (Continuar la instalación).  
10  
La pantalla indicará “The software was successfully installed”  
(El software se ha instalado correctamente).  
Haga clic en [Restart] (Reiniciar) para reiniciar el sistema.  
Precauciones al utilizar el PCR  
Antes de utilizar el software secuenciador, tenga en cuenta los siguientes aspectos:  
* Conecte el PCR-30/50/80 al sistema mediante un cable USB antes de iniciar el software secuenciador  
u otro software.  
* No desconecte el cable USB del PCR-30/50/80 mientras se esté ejecutando el software secuenciador u otro  
software.  
* Desconecte el cable USB del PCR-30/50/80 sólo después de haber salido del software secuenciador u otro  
software.  
* Deje la función Sleep del Macintosh desactivada.  
* El PCR-30/50/80 no funcionará en el entorno Classic de Mac OS X. Utilice el PCR cuando no se esté  
ejecutando el entorno Classic.  
1 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instalación y configuración del controlador (Macintosh)  
● Configuración del controlador  
1
Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al sistema.  
1 . Con el interruptor POWER apagado (OFF), conecte el adaptador de CA  
al PCR-30/50/80.  
2 . Conecte el adaptador de CA a una toma de corriente eléctrica.  
3 . Utilice el cable USB para conectar el PCR-30/50/80 al sistema.  
2
Coloque el Interruptor POWER del PCR-30/ 50/ 80 en la posición ON  
(encendido).  
Si desea obtener detalles  
sobre la configuración de  
aparatos MIDI, consulte  
el manual del usuario para  
el software que esté  
3
Configure el dispositivo MIDI en el software secuenciador. Para obtener más  
información sobre el aparato MIDI de entrada/salida que debe seleccionar,  
consulte el apartado “About the ports when using a USB connection”  
(pág. 159).  
utilizando.  
Con esto se finaliza el procedimiento para conectar el PCR-30/ 50/ 80 al  
sistema Macintosh, instalar el controlador MIDI y configurar el controlador.  
1 1 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O p e ra tio n  
The PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is a controller that transmits MIDI messages. You cannot perform using only  
the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 by itself. You will need to connect it to a sound module or computer.  
The various controllers ([R1--R8], [S1--S8], [B1--B6], [L1--L3], [P1, P2]) can be assigned almost any  
message you want to get the control you need for your particular setup. For details on the messages  
that can be assigned, refer to “Controller settings” (p. 126).  
1 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Co n n e ctio n a n d MIDI d a ta flo w  
This section explains how to make basic connections for the PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn  
off the power on all devices before making any connections.  
* Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5; sold separately). By connecting any other expression pedals,  
you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit.  
W h e n u sin g MIDI co n n e ctio n s  
fig.connect-usb  
AC adaptor  
MIDI sound module (sold separately)  
MIDI IN  
DP-2 (sold separately)  
EV-5 (sold separately)  
MIDI OUT  
PCR-30/50/80  
MIDI OUT  
BULK RECEPTION  
MIDI IN  
PORT 1  
PORT 2 /  
BULK TRANSMISSION  
* For an explanation of the items in the diagram, refer to “About the ports when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
1 1 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connection and MIDI data flow  
W h e n u sin g a USB co n n e ctio n  
fig.connect-usb  
AC adaptor  
USB cable  
It is not necessary to connect the  
AC adaptor if you are using a USB  
connection. However, with some  
computers, the PCR-30/50 may  
not operate when powered from  
the USB bus. In this case, set the  
power switch to the DC position  
and connect the AC adaptor.  
DP-2 (sold separately)  
R o l a n d  
EV-5 (sold separately)  
V-LINK OFF  
PC  
PCR-30/50/80  
USB  
MIDI OUT DEVICE  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT  
MIDI OUT  
EDIROL PCR  
BULK RECEPTION  
MIDI IN DEVICE  
EDIROL PCR MIDI IN  
MIDI IN  
EDIROL PCR 1  
EDIROL PCR 2  
PORT 1  
PORT 2 /  
BULK TRANSMISSION  
V-LINK ON  
PC  
PCR-30/50/80  
USB  
MIDI OUT DEVICE  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT  
MIDI OUT  
MIDI IN  
EDIROL PCR  
BULK  
RECEPTION  
MIDI IN DEVICE  
EDIROL PCR MIDI IN  
EDIROL PCR 1  
EDIROL PCR 2  
PORT 1  
PORT 2 /  
BULK TRANSMISSION  
* If V-LINK is ON, PCR 1 and PCR 2 messages will be sent both to USB and to the MIDI connector.  
* For an explanation of the items in the diagram, refer to “About the ports when using a USB  
connection” (p. 159).  
1 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Ba sic o p e ra tio n  
Ho w to sw itch m o d e s  
You can switch modes at any time, as shown below.  
Mode  
Switcing modes  
Explanation  
Transmit MIDI messages by  
playing the keyboard or  
operating the controllers.  
PLAY mode  
(p. 117)  
When you turn on the power, the PCR-30/ 50/ 80  
will start up in PLAY mode.  
Press the [MIDI CH] button.  
MIDI Channel mode  
(MIDI CH)  
(p. 118)  
Set the transmit channel  
(current channel) for the  
keyboard and bender lever.  
Press the [PROGRAM  
CHANGE] button.  
Program Change  
mode  
Transmit program change  
messages on the current  
channel.  
(PROGRAM  
CHANGE)  
(p. 119)  
Simultaneously press the  
[PROGRAM CHANGE]  
button and [MIDI CH]  
button.  
Bank mode  
(BANK)  
(p. 120)  
Transmit bank select  
messages (MSB, LSB) on the  
current channel.  
Press the [MEMORY]  
button.  
Memory mode  
(MEMORY)  
(p. 121)  
Recall a memory set from  
internal memory into the  
current memory (p. 136).  
Simultaneously press the  
[MEMORY] button and the  
[MIDI CH] button.  
Snapshot mode  
(SNAPSHOT)  
(p. 122)  
Transmit the current values  
of all controllers ([R1--R8],  
[S1--S8]) at once.  
Simultaneously press the  
[PROGRAM CHANGE]  
button and the [EDIT]  
button.  
Stop "stuck" notes or other  
problems with the sound on a  
connected MIDI sound  
module.  
Panic mode  
(PANIC)  
(p. 123)  
Press the [EDIT] button.  
Assign MIDI messages to the  
controllers, transmit/ receive  
bulk data, or make system  
settings.  
Edit mode  
(EDIT)  
(p. 125)  
You are returned to Play mode once a setting or a process has been completed within the other  
modes. If you want to return to Play mode without completing a setting or operation, press the  
button for the current mode (i.e., the button that is lit). Alternatively, press the [CANCEL] button.  
The setting you were in the process of making will be discarded.  
1 1 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic operation  
PLAY m o d e  
When you power up the PCR-30/ 50/ 80, it will start up in PLAY mode. The display will show  
the current channel (p. 118).  
* The PCR-30/50/80 will start up according to the Startup Memory settings (p. 164). With the factory  
settings, it will start up with the GM2 MEMORY. For the messages that are assigned to each controller  
by the GM2 MEMORY, refer to p. 164.  
● Controllers you can operate  
These controllers will transmit the messages that are assigned  
to each.  
* The transmitted value will be shown in the display.  
[R1–R8], [S1–S8], [B1–B6]  
[L1–L3], [P1, P2]  
Octave shift  
* [OCTAVE -] or [OCTAVE +] will light depending on the current  
octave shift setting. The actual octave shift value will appear in  
[OCTAVE -/+]  
the display only while you are editing the setting (-4–5).  
Transpose  
* If you hold down [TRANSPOSE] for a while, [OCTAVE -] or  
[TRANSPOSE]+[OCTAVE -/+]  
[OCTAVE +] will light depending on the current transpose  
setting. The actual transpose value will appear in the display  
only while you are editing the setting (-12–12).  
Bender or modulation messages will be transmitted on the  
current channel  
Bender lever  
Keyboard  
Note messages will be transmitted on the current channel  
* Octave Shift and Transpose are set independently.  
* If you simultaneously press [OCTAVE -] and [OCTAVE +], the Octave Shift setting will be reset to 0.  
* If you hold down [TRANSPOSE] and press [OCTAVE -] and [OCTAVE +] simultaneously, the Transpose  
setting will be reset to 0.  
1 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic operation  
MIDI Ch a n n e l m o d e (MIDI CH)  
This mode lets you set the transmission channel (current channel) of the keyboard and bender  
lever.  
Each controller has its own independent transmission channel setting. However, if OMNI mode  
(p. 149) is on, the controllers will also transmit on the current channel you specify here.  
fig.MIDIch-1_80  
3
1
2
1
2
Press the [MIDI CH] button.  
The [MIDI CH] button will light. The display will show the current channel setting.  
* The [HEX] or [DECIMAL] button will also light according to the input mode (p. 158).  
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify  
the desired channel number.  
DEC  
INC  
Change the current value by -1  
Change the current value by +1  
The input value  
0–F  
HEX...0–F  
DECIMAL...1–16  
3
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.  
The current channel has now been set.  
1 1 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Basic operation  
Pro g ra m Ch a n g e m o d e (PRO GRAM CHAN GE)  
This mode lets you transmit a program change message on the current channel.  
fig.PC-1_80  
2
3
1
1
Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] button.  
The [PROGRAM CHANGE] button will light. The display will indicate the program change that  
was transmitted most recently.  
* The [HEX] or [DECIMAL] button will also light according to the input mode (p. 158).  
2
3
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the  
program change you want to transmit.  
DEC  
INC  
Change the current value by -1  
Change the current value by +1  
The input value  
0–F  
HEX...00–7F  
DECIMAL...1–128  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.  
The program change has now been transmitted.  
1 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic operation  
Ba n k m o d e (BAN K)  
This mode lets you transmit a bank select (MSB, LSB) message on the current channel. The program  
change message you most recently transmitted (specified) in Program Change mode (p. 119) will  
also be transmitted following the bank select message.  
fig.BANK-1_80  
1
2 ,4  
3 ,5  
1
Simultaneously press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] button and [MIDI CH]  
button.  
The [PROGRAM CHANGE] and [MIDI CH] buttons will light. The display will indicate the most  
recently transmitted bank select (MSB) value.  
* The [HEX] or [DECIMAL] button will also light according to the input mode (p. 158).  
fig.BANK-2  
2
First, specify the bank select MSB (CC#00).  
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the bank select  
MSB that you want to transmit.  
*1 Reference  
3
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.  
fig.BANK-3  
4
Next, specify the bank select LSB (CC#32).  
The display will indicate the most recently transmitted bank select (LSB) value.  
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the bank select  
LSB that you want to transmit.  
*1 Reference  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.  
The bank select has now been transmitted.  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode  
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,  
1 2 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or will blink if the value is different.  
           
Basic operation  
Me m o ry m o d e (MEMO RY)  
This mode lets you recall one of the stored memory sets into the current memory (p. 148).  
When the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is shipped, its internal memory contains sixteen different settings.  
For details on the contents of each memory number, refer to “Memory sets” (p. 164).  
If you edit the controller settings of a memory you recall, and want to keep your changes, you must  
save the memory before powering down the PCR-30/ 50/ 80. For the procedure, refer to  
“EDIT-Save” p. 148.  
For details on customizing (editing) the controller settings, refer to “Edit mode (EDIT)” (p. 125).  
fig.memory-1_80  
1
2
3
1
Press the [MEMORY] button.  
The [MEMORY] button will light. The display will indicate the memory number that you selected  
most recently.  
2
3
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the  
memory number that you want to recall.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The setting will be cancelled if you press another button instead of the [ENTER] button.  
The memory has now been recalled.  
1 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic operation  
Sn a p sh o t m o d e (SN APSHO T)  
Once you have set the various controllers to the desired settings, you can transmit a detailed  
description of this state in the form of a “snapshot”. When you execute this function, the current  
values of the controllers ([R1–R8], [S1–S8]) will be transmitted.  
This is convenient when you want to record the state of these controllers together at the beginning  
of a song in your sequencer, as the initial values.  
fig.snap-1_80  
1
2
1
2
Simultaneously press the [MEMORY] button and the [MIDI CH] button.  
The [MEMORY] and [MIDI CH] buttons will light.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The [MEMORY] button and [MIDI CH] button will blink several times.  
The snapshot will be transmitted.  
1 2 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic operation  
Pa n ic m o d e (PAN IC)  
If notes on a connected MIDI sound module become “stuck”, or if there is something wrong  
with the sound, you can execute the Panic function to solve the problem.  
When you execute the Panic function, All Sound Off, All Notes Off, and Reset All Controllers  
messages will be transmitted on all channels.  
fig.panic-1_80  
1
2
1
2
Simultaneously press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] button and [EDIT] button.  
The [PROGRAM CHANGE] button and [EDIT] button will light.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The [PROGRAM CHANGE] button and [EDIT] button will blink.  
The Panic function has now been executed.  
1 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
MEMO  
1 2 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ed it m o d e (EDIT)  
Press the [EDIT] button to enter Edit mode. In Edit mode you can make  
the following settings.  
fig.edit-1  
fig.edt  
Selected item  
Display  
Refer to  
Description  
[R1--R8]  
[S1--S8]  
[B1--B6]  
[L1--L3]  
[P1, P2]  
“Controllersettings”  
(p. 126)  
Assign a desired MIDI message  
to the controller.  
Indicates the number of  
the selected controller  
Keyboard  
[BULK]  
Transmit or receive the contents of  
a memory set as bulk data.  
“BULK” (p. 151)  
“SYSTEM” (p. 154)  
“SAVE” (p. 148)  
Keyboard  
[SYSTEM]  
Make system settings for the PCR.  
Keyboard  
[SAVE]  
Save the current memory settings  
into a memory.  
Specify whether the output channel  
and output port for messages will  
follow the setting of the controller  
or the system setting.  
Keyboard  
[OMNI]  
“OMNI” (p. 149)  
Specify whether ALL BULK  
reception and SAVE operations will  
be prohibited.  
Keyboard  
[PROTECT]  
“PROTECT” (p. 150)  
For details, refer to the explanation of how to set each item.  
1 2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Edit mode (EDIT)  
Co n tro lle r se ttin g s  
You can assign the following functions to a controller.  
* After you have modified the controller settings, perform the “SAVE” (p. 148) operation as needed. If you  
turn off the power without executing “SAVE”, your changes will be lost.  
NOTE  
“NOTE ASSIGN” (p. 127)  
AFTERTOUCH  
CONTROL CHANGE  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
RPN  
“AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN” (p. 129)  
“CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN” (p. 132)  
“PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN” (p. 135)  
“RPN/NRPN ASSIGN” (p. 138)  
“RPN/NRPN ASSIGN” (p. 138)  
“SYS EX. ASSIGN” (p. 140)  
NRPN  
SYSTEM Ex.  
TEMPO  
“TEMPO ASSIGN” (p. 146)  
NO ASSIGN  
“NO ASSIGN” (p. 146)  
A Copy function is also available. For the procedure, refer to “ASSIGN COPY” (p. 147).  
* For NOTE, AFTERTOUCH, CONTROL CHANGE, PROGRAM CHANGE, RPN, NRPN, and  
SYSTEM Ex., the rightmost digit (third place) in the display is a number that indicates the mode (Basic mode  
or Advanced mode).  
* If you want to assign a single-byte system message (system realtime message, tune request) or a freely  
specified message of up to 24 bytes, refer to “SYS EX. ASSIGN” (p. 140).  
How Basic mode and Advanced mode differ  
Each assignment can be made either in Basic mode or Advanced mode.  
Use the mode that is appropriate for your purpose.  
• Basic mode  
You can make assignments easily, with the minimum number of steps.  
• Advanced mode A greater number of steps are required, but you can specify more  
parameters and make more sophisticated assignments.  
1 2 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● NOTE ASSIGN  
Here’s how to assign a Note message to a controller. In addition to being used to play sounds, note  
messages can also be used to control a sequencer.  
Mode  
Basic mode  
Advanced mode  
Keyboard  
Velocity  
100 (64H)  
Assignable  
Port  
PCR 1  
Assignable  
0
1
Basic mode  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT.”  
fig.r-1  
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Note  
message. In the case of a button, press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3
Verify that the display shows the correct controller number, and press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.nt0  
4
Press the [NOTE] key.  
The display will indicate “NT0.”  
fig.c  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “C--.”  
*1 Reference  
6
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.  
fig.n  
7
8
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “N--.”  
*1 Reference  
Input the note number. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the note  
number.  
9
Press the [ENTER] button.  
10  
If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (●“Specifying the  
button mode” (p. 158))  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode  
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,  
1 2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or will blink if the value is different.  
   
Edit mode (EDIT)  
Advanced mode  
Advanced mode 1 of NOTE ASSIGN lets you specify the velocity value in addition to the items of  
Basic mode.  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Note message. In the case of  
a button, press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3 . Verify that the display indicates the correct controller, and press the [ENTER] button.  
4 . Press the [NOTE] key and then press key [1].  
The display will indicate “NT1.”  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
6 . Input the channel.  
7 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
8 . Input the note number.  
9 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.v  
The display will indicate “V--.”  
*1 Reference  
1 0 . Input the velocity.  
1 1 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.p  
The display will indicate “P--.”  
*1 Reference  
1 2 . Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
1 3 . If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.  
(●“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))  
•
•
If you set [S1--S8], [R1--R8], or [P2] to NOTE ASSIGN, setting the controller to the  
maximum position will transmit the specified velocity value. Setting the controller  
to the minimum position will transmit a note message with a velocity of 0.  
If you assign this to [B1--B6] or [P1], the specified velocity value will be transmitted  
when you turn the controller on. When you turn the controller off, a note message  
with a velocity value of 0 will be transmitted.  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode  
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,  
1 2 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or will blink if the value is different.  
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN  
Here’s how to assign an Aftertouch message to a controller.  
Mode  
Basic mode  
Advanced mode 1  
Advanced mode 2  
Advanced mode 3  
Keyboard  
Message  
Value range  
00–7FH  
Assignable  
00–7FH  
Port  
Port 1  
Assignable  
Port 1  
Assignable  
0
1
2
3
Channel Pressure  
Channel Pressure  
Polyphonic Key Pressure  
Polyphonic Key Pressure  
Assignable  
Basic mode  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT.”  
fig.r-1  
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign an Aftertouch  
message. In the case of a button, press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3
Verify that the display shows the correct controller number, and press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.at0  
4
Press the [AFTERTOUCH] key.  
The display will indicate “AT0”.  
fig.c  
5
Verify that the display is correct, and press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “C--”.  
*1 Reference  
6
7
8
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (●“Specifying the  
button mode” (p. 158))  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode  
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,  
1 2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or will blink if the value is different.  
       
Edit mode (EDIT)  
Advanced mode 1–3  
Advanced mode 1 of AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN lets you specify the upper and lower limits of the  
aftertouch value in addition to the items of Basic mode. Advanced modes 2 and 3 let you specify an  
aftertouch message for an individual note (Polyphonic Key Pressure) instead of specifying the channel.  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign an Aftertouch message. In the  
case of a button, press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3 . Verify that the display indicates the correct controller, and press the [ENTER] button.  
4 . Press the [AFTERTOUCH] key and then press a key [1]–[3].  
The display will indicate the selected mode.  
fig.at1  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
6 . Input the channel.  
7 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
8 . If you are using Advanced modes 2 or 3, input the note number.  
9 . If you are using Advanced modes 2 or 3, Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 0 . If you are using Advanced modes 1 or 3, specify the upper limit and lower limit of  
the value as described in “Aftertouch Assign upper/lower limit and port settings”  
(p. 131), and specify the output port.  
1 1 . If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.  
(●“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))  
1 3 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit mode (EDIT)  
Aftertouch Assign upper/lower limit and port settings  
In the case of Aftertouch Assign 1 or 3, you can set the upper limit and lower limit of the value, and  
specify the port.  
fig.max  
1 . The following display will appear.  
*1 Reference  
2 . Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the upper limit.  
3 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.min  
The following display will appear.  
*1 Reference  
4 . Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the lower limit.  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.p1  
The display will indicate “P--”.  
*1 Reference  
6 . Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode  
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,  
1 3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or will blink if the value is different.  
 
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN  
Here’s how to assign a control change message to a controller.  
Mode  
keyboard  
Value range  
Port  
Basic mode  
Advanced mode 1  
Advanced mode 2  
0
1
2
00–7FH  
Assignable  
Simulates a rotary encoder  
PCR 1  
Assignable  
Assignable  
Basic mode  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Control Change message. In the  
case of a button, press that button.  
fig.r-1  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.cc0  
4
Press the [CONTROL CHANGE] key.  
The display will indicate “CC0”.  
fig.c  
5
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “C--”.  
*1 Reference  
6
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.  
fig.n  
7
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “N--”.  
*1 Reference  
8
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the control change number.  
9
Press the [ENTER] button.  
10  
If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (●“Specifying the  
button mode” (p. 158))  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or  
mode of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently  
1 3 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
set value, or will blink if the value is different.  
   
Edit mode (EDIT)  
Advanced mode 1  
Advanced mode 1 of CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN lets you specify the upper and lower limits of the  
control change value in addition to the items of Basic mode.  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
1 1 . Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys  
to specify the upper limit value.  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want  
to assign a Control Change message. In the case  
of a button, press that button.  
1 2 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 3 . The following display will appear.  
The display will indicate the number of  
the selected controller.  
fig.min  
*1 Reference  
3 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the  
[ENTER] button.  
1 4 . Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys  
4 . Press the [CONTROL CHANGE] key and then  
press key [1].  
to specify the lower limit value.  
1 5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “CC1”.  
1 6 . The display will indicate “P--”.  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
6 . Input the channel.  
fig.p1  
*1 Reference  
7 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
8 . Input the control change number.  
9 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 7 . Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the  
port” (p. 159))  
1 8 . If you are making an assignment for a button,  
specify the button mode. (●“Specifying the  
button mode” (p. 158))  
1 0 . The following display will appear.  
fig.max  
*1 Reference  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode  
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,  
1 3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or will blink if the value is different.  
Edit mode (EDIT)  
Advanced mode 2  
Advanced mode 2 simulates the operation of a conventional rotary encoder. If this is assigned to a  
controller, moving that controller toward the right (upward) of center will have the same effect as  
turning the encoder clockwise, and moving the controller toward the left (downward) of center will  
have the same effect as turning the encoder counterclockwise. As the controller is moved further away  
from the center, the result will be the same as if the rotary encoder were moved more quickly.  
You can assign advanced mode 2 to a button, but it will not function.  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Control Change message.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
4 . Press the [CONTROL CHANGE] key and then press key [2].  
The display will indicate “CC2”.  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
6 . Input the channel.  
7 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
8 . Input the control change number. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to  
specify the control change number.  
9 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 0 . The display will indicate “P--”.  
*1 Reference  
1 1 . Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or  
mode of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently  
1 3 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
set value, or will blink if the value is different.  
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN  
Here’s how to assign a program change message to a controller.  
Mode  
Number  
Effect  
Bank  
Port  
Basic mode  
0
1
2
3
4
Fixed value  
Assignable range of values  
Fixed value  
PC DEC  
Not output  
Not output  
Output  
Not output  
Not output  
PCR 1  
PCR 1  
Advanced mode 1  
Advanced mode 2  
Advanced mode 3  
Advanced mode 4  
Assignable  
KEYBOARD PORT (p. 154)  
KEYBOARD PORT (p. 154)  
PC INC  
Basic mode  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT.”  
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign a Program Change message. In the  
case of a button, press that button.  
fig.r-1  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.pc0  
4
Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] key.  
The display will indicate “PC0”.  
fig.c  
5
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “C--”.  
*1 Reference  
6
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.  
fig.n  
7
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “N--”.  
*1 Reference  
8
9
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the program change number.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
* If you assign Basic mode to [S1--S8], [R1--R8], or [P2], moving the controller from the minimum to the  
maximum position will transmit the assigned control change messages.  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode  
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,  
1 3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or will blink if the value is different.  
   
Edit mode (EDIT)  
Advance mode 1, 2  
Advanced mode 1 of PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN lets you specify the upper and lower limits of the  
program change value. Advanced mode 2 lets you transmit BANK LSB/ MSB settings in addition to  
the program change.  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
Advanced mode 2  
—Transmitting bank data  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want  
to assign a Program Change message. In the  
case of a button, press that button. The display  
will indicate the number of the selected  
controller.  
4 . Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] key and then  
press key [2].  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
6 . Input the channel.  
3 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the  
7 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
[ENTER] button.  
8 . Specify the bank select MSB (CC#00). Use the  
[DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to  
Advanced mode 1  
—Specifying the range of values  
specify the MSB.  
fig.BANK-2  
4 . Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] key and then  
press key [1].  
*1 Reference  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
6 . Input the channel.  
9 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 0 . Specify the bank select LSB (CC#32). Use the  
7 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
[DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to  
specify the LSB.  
8 . The following display will appear.  
fig.BANK-3  
fig.max  
*1 Reference  
*1 Reference  
1 1 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 2 . Input the program change number.  
1 3 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
9 . Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys  
to specify the upper value limit.  
1 0 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 1 . The following display will appear.  
1 4 . The display will indicate “P--”.  
fig.min  
fig.p1  
*1 Reference  
*1 Reference  
1 2 . Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys  
1 5 . Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the  
to specify the lower value limit.  
port” (p. 159))  
1 3 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or  
mode of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently  
1 3 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
set value, or will blink if the value is different.  
Edit mode (EDIT)  
Advanced modes 3 and 4  
Advanced mode 3 lets you assign the Program Change Decrement function (PC DEC) to a  
controller.  
Advanced mode 4 lets you assign the Program Change Increment function (PC INC) to a controller.  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign Program Change DEC/ INC.  
In the case of a button, press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
4 . Press the [PROGRAM CHANGE] key and then press key [3] or [4].  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
Program Change Decrement function (PC DEC)  
This transmits a program change that is one less than the previously transmitted program  
change number.  
Program Change Increment function (PC INC)  
This transmits a program change that is one greater than the previously transmitted program  
change number.  
The PC DEC or PC INC is transmitted on the current channel, just as in “Program Change mode  
(PROGRAM CHANGE)” (p. 119). The value that is actually transmitted will appear in the display.  
* In the explanation here, the "previously transmitted program number" refers to the one that was last  
transmitted by Advanced Mode 3 or 4 or in “Program Change mode (PROGRAM CHANGE)”  
(p. 119).  
* Program changes transmitted by basic mode or advanced modes 1 and 2 will not affect the increment/  
decrement functions.  
1 3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● RPN/NRPN ASSIGN  
Here’s how you can assign an RPN or NRPN message to a controller.  
Data entry MSB  
(CC#6) range  
00–7FH  
Data entry LSB  
(CC#38) range  
Not transmitted  
00–7FH  
Mode  
Keyboard  
Port  
Basic mode  
Advanced mode 1  
0
1
PCR 1  
Assignable  
Assignable  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign an RPN or NRPN message. In the  
case of a button, press that button.  
fig.r-1  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
4
Press the [RPN] key.  
fig.rp0  
The display will indicate “RP0”.  
fig.np0  
* If you want to assign an NRPN message, press the [NRPN] key. The following  
procedure is the same as for RPN.  
fig.c  
5
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will blink “C--”.  
*1 Reference  
6
Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.  
7
Press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.BANK-2  
8
9
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the RPN MSB  
(CC#101) or NRPN MSB (CC#99).  
*1 Reference  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or  
mode of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently  
1 3 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
set value, or will blink if the value is different.  
   
Edit mode (EDIT)  
fig.BANK-3  
10  
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the RPN LSB  
(CC#100) or NRPN LSB (CC#98).  
*1 Reference  
11  
12  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (●“Specifying the  
button mode” (p. 158))  
Advanced mode  
In Advanced mode for RPN/ NRPN, you can specify the upper and lower limit of the data entry MSB  
(CC#6) value when the RPN/ NRPN message is transmitted, as well as the various settings available  
in Basic mode.  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
1 1 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want  
to assign the RPN or NRPN message. In the case  
of a button, press that button.  
1 2 . The following display will appear.  
fig.max  
*1 Reference  
The display will indicate the number of  
the selected controller.  
1 3 . Use the [0]–[F] keys to specify the upper  
limit of the data entry MSB (CC#6) value.  
3 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the  
[ENTER] button.  
1 4 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
4 . Press the [RPN] key and then press key [1].  
1 5 . The following display will appear.  
fig.min  
*
If you want to assign an NRPN message, press the  
[NRPN] key. The following procedure is the same as  
for RPN.  
*1 Reference  
1 6 . Use the [0]–[F] keys to specify the lower  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
limit of the data entry MSB (CC#6) value.  
6 . Input the channel. Use the [DEC][INC] buttons  
1 7 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the channel.  
1 8 . The display will indicate “P--.”  
7 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.p1  
8 . Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys  
to specify the RPN MSB (CC#101) or NRPN  
MSB (CC#99).  
*1 Reference  
1 9 . Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the  
9 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
port” (p. 159))  
1 0 . Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys  
to specify the RPN LSB (CC#100) or NRPN LSB  
(CC#98).  
2 0 . If you are making an assignment for a button,  
specify the button mode. (●“Specifying the  
button mode” (p. 158))  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode  
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,  
1 3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or will blink if the value is different.  
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● SYS EX. ASSIGN  
Here’s how you can assign a system exclusive message to a controller. Advanced mode 2 lets you  
assign a single-byte system message (System realtime message, tune request).  
Advanced modes 3 and 4 let you assign any desired message.(Input up to 24 bytes)  
Mode  
number  
Key-  
board  
Mode  
Value range Required ending Notes/restrictions  
Basic mode  
Advanced  
mode 1  
0
Sys Ex. message  
Sys Ex. message  
Default range  
Assignable  
Input F7  
Input F7  
1st byte fixed at F0  
1st byte fixed at F0  
1
[0–5, 7, 9, D, E ] [DATA]  
[CHECKSUM] buttons  
are invalid  
Advanced  
mode 2  
2
Single byte system message  
–
–
Advanced  
mode 3  
Advanced  
mode 4  
Specified number of  
bytes  
Specified number of  
bytes  
[CHECKSUM] button is  
3
4
Any desired MIDI message Default range  
Any desired MIDI message Assignable  
invalid  
[CHECKSUM] button is  
invalid  
SYS EX. ASSIGN can calculate the checksum automatically, and lets you specify a variable (data)  
range or embed a channel/ block number within the message. (“Sys Ex. ASSIGN items” (p. 160))  
In SYS EX. ASSIGN, the input mode will be HEX mode.  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign the system exclusive message. In the  
case of a button, press that button.  
fig.r-1  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3
fig.se0  
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
4
Press the [SYSTEM Ex.] key.  
5
If you want to select an Advanced mode, press a key from [1] to [4].  
The selected mode will blink in the display.  
6
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.f0  
For Basic mode or Advanced mode 1  
The display will blink “F0”, which is the first byte (starting status byte)  
of a system exclusive message. (This cannot be changed.)  
7
Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
8
Use the [0]–[F] keys to input the second byte.  
9
Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 4 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Edit mode (EDIT)  
10  
11  
Input the third and subsequent bytes in the same way.  
When you have finished inputting the message, use the keyboard to enter [F] and [7],  
specifying the ending status byte “F7”.  
12  
13  
14  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.  
(●“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))  
For Advanced mode 2  
The display will indicate “F-.”  
7
Use the [6], [8], [A]–[C], [F] keys to specify the system message.  
8
Press the [ENTER] button.  
9
Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
For Advanced modes 3 or 4  
The display will indicate “L--”.  
7
Use the [0]–[F] keys of the keyboard to specify the number (decimal) of bytes  
you want to input.  
*1 Reference  
8
Press the [ENTER] button.  
9
Use the [0]–[F] keys to input the first byte.  
10  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
11  
Input the second and subsequent bytes in the same way.  
12  
After you have input the number of bytes you specified in step 7, the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 will  
check whether the messages you've input are indeed valid MIDI messages. If there is a  
problem, the display will indicate “ERR”.  
In this case, you should press the [ENTER] button, which takes you back to step 7, where you can  
input the values over again.  
*1 The -- area displays the currently set value. If it has not been set, the default setting will be displayed. Even if you change the type or mode  
of the MIDI message that is assigned, the default setting will be displayed. This will be lit if the value is the same as the currently set value,  
1 4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or will blink if the value is different.  
Edit mode (EDIT)  
13  
In the case of Advanced mode 4, specify the upper and lower limits.  
14  
15  
Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (●“Specifying the  
button mode” (p. 158))  
Here are some examples of inputting various actual system exclusive messages.  
● GM2 System On  
F0 7E 7F 09 03 F7  
Here’s how to assign a GM2 System On system exclusive message in Basic mode.  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign the system exclusive  
message. In the case of a button, press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
4 . Press the [SYSTEM Ex.] key.  
The display will indicate “SE0”.  
5 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “F0”, which is the first byte (beginning status) of a system exclusive  
message. This cannot be changed. (This cannot be changed.)  
6 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
7 . Use the [7] and [E] keys to input the second byte “7E”.  
8 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
9 . Use the [7] and [F] keys to input the third byte “7F”.  
1 0 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
Input the fourth and fifth bytes in the same way.  
1 1 . Finally, use the [F] and [7] keys to input the ending status byte “F7”.  
1 2 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
1 3 . Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
1 4 . If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.  
(●“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))  
The GM2 System On message has now been assigned.  
1 4 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● Master Volume  
F0 7F 7F 04 01 vL vM F7  
Since a Master Volume message has a data range of 00 00–7F 7F and we do not need to specify the  
range, we will use Basic mode. Since the two bytes of data are in the order of LSB and then MSB,  
we will select “DT3” when we input the data.  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign the system exclusive message. In the  
case of a button, press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
4 . Press the [SYSTEM Ex.] key.  
The display will blink “SE0”.  
5 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will indicate “F0,” which is the first byte (beginning status) of a system exclusive  
message. (This cannot be changed.)  
6 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
7 . Use the [7] and [F] keys to input the second byte “7F”.  
8 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
Input the third, fourth and fifth bytes in the same way.  
9 . Since the sixth byte is the data area, press the [DATA] key, and then press [3].  
The display will indicate “DT3”.  
1 0 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
1 1 . Since we selected “DT3” as the sixth byte, the seventh byte will automatically be  
allocated as the data area and cannot be modified.  
1 2 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
1 3 . Use the [F] and [7] keys to input the ending status byte “F7”.  
1 4 . Confirm what’s indicated, and press the [ENTER] button.  
1 5 . Specify the output port. (●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
1 6 . If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode.  
(●“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))  
The Master Volume message has now been assigned.  
1 4 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● Bend Pitch Control  
fig.checksum  
Since the GS Bend Pitch Control message has a data  
Block number  
1 byte  
range of 40H–58H (0–24 semitones), we will select  
Advanced mode 1, which lets us specify the range.  
Since the data format is one byte, we will select  
“DT0” (p. 161) when inserting the data.  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 2x 10 DATA SUM F7  
Address  
Checksum calculation region  
Data Checksum  
1 . Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2 . Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign the system exclusive message. In the case of a  
button, press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3 . Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].  
4 . Press the [SYSTEM Ex.] key, and then press the [1] key.  
The display will indicate “SE1”.  
5 . Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].  
The display will blink “F0”, which is the first byte (beginning status) of a system exclusive message.  
(This cannot be changed.)  
6 . Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].  
7 . Use the [4] and [1] keys to input the second byte “41”.  
8 . Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].  
Input the third, fourth and fifth bytes in the same way.  
9 . Since the sixth byte is the beginning of the checksum calculation area, press the [CHECKSUM] key to specify  
this byte as the beginning of the area for which the checksum will be calculated.  
1 0 . Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].  
1 1 . Input the sixth byte.  
1 2 . Since the seventh byte will have “2” in the upper bits and the block number in the lower bits, press [DATA]  
three times.  
The display will indicate “0BL”.  
1 4 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit mode (EDIT)  
1 3 . To specify “2” for the upper bits, press the [2] key.  
The display will indicate “2BL”.  
1 4 . Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].  
1 5 . In the same way, enter bytes 8.  
1 6 . Since the ninth byte is the data area, press the [DATA] key.  
The display will indicate “DT0.”  
1 7 . Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].  
1 8 . Since the ten byte will contain the checksum, press the [CHECKSUM] key to specify the location at which the  
checksum will be input.  
The display will blink “CS1” (Checksum Type 1).  
1 9 . Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].  
2 0 . Press the [F] and then [7] keys to input the ending status “F7.”  
2 1 . Confirm what’s indicated and press [ENTER].  
2 2 . Next, specify an upper limit value of “58” for the data area.  
2 3 . Press [ENTER].  
2 4 . Specify a lower limit value of “40” for the data area.  
2 5 . Press [ENTER].  
2 6 . Specify the output port.  
(●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
2 7 . If you are making an assignment for a button, specify the button mode. (●“Specifying the button mode”  
(p. 158))  
The GS Bend Pitch Control message has been assigned.  
1 4 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● TEMPO ASSIGN  
You can assign a controller to adjust the speed (20–250) of the F8 Clock message.  
* In order to transmit F8 Clock messages, the F8 CLOCK setting must be “ON”.  
(●“F8 CLOCK ON/OFF” (p. 154))  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT.”  
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to assign TEMPO. In the case of a button,  
press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
fig.r-1  
3
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
4
Press the [TEMPO] key.  
The display will indicate “TMP”.  
fig.tmp  
5
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
6
If you are making the assignment for a button, specify the button mode.  
(●“Specifying the button mode” (p. 158))  
* In the case of a button, the value will be fixed at maximum (250) for ON, and minimum (20) for OFF.  
● NO ASSIGN  
Here’s how you can cancel the message assigned to a controller. Once its assignment is cancelled,  
no message will be transmitted when you operate that particular controller.  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Slightly move the controller whose assignment you want to cancel. In the case of a button,  
press that button.  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
fig.r-1  
3
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
1 4 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Edit mode (EDIT)  
fig.noa  
4
Press the [NO ASSIGN] key.  
The display will indicate “NOA”.  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.yes  
6
The display will blink “YES,” so press the [ENTER] button once again.  
● ASSIGN COPY  
Here’s how a message assigned to a controller can be copied to another controller.  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Slightly move the controller to which you want to copy the assignment (the “copy  
destination”). In the case of a button, press that button.  
fig.r-1  
The display will indicate the number of the selected controller.  
3
4
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
Slightly move the controller whose assignment you want to copy (the “copy source”). In  
the case of a button, press that button.  
fig.cpy  
The display will indicate “CPY”.  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will blink the copy-source controller number.  
fig.s-1  
6
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
1 4 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Edit mode (EDIT)  
SAVE  
Here’s how to save the settings of the current memory into internal memory.  
You can save settings into internal memory numbers 1–F.  
You cannot save to memory number 0 (GM2).  
* After you edit the settings, perform the “SAVE” (p. 148) operation as needed. If you turn off the power  
without performing “SAVE”, your changes will be lost.  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Press the [SAVE] key.  
fig.sav  
The display will blink “SAV.”  
3
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
* If the display indicates "PTC", it means that the Save could not be carried out  
because the PROTECT setting (p. 62) is on. Turn PROTECT off, and then try  
the operation once again from step 1.  
4
5
Select a memory number 1–F. Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [1]–[F] keys to specify  
the save-destination memory number.  
The specified memory number will blink in the display.  
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
About the memories of the PCR  
The PCR has the following sixteen memories.  
Memory number 0  
Memory number 1  
:
GM2 SET  
Cannot be saved  
Can be saved  
User memories (15)  
Memory number F  
“Current memory” is a location into which you can recall one of these memories.  
In order to use one of the saved memories, you must recall it into current memory as described in  
“Memory mode (MEMORY)” (p. 121).  
The contents of current memory will be lost when you turn off the power. If you have modified the  
settings in current memory, perform the “SAVE” operation if you want to keep your changes.  
You can set the “STARTUP MEMORY” (p. 154) setting to specify the memory that will be loaded  
into current memory when you turn on the power.  
1 4 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Edit mode (EDIT)  
O MN I  
If you turn the Omni setting ON, all messages will be transmitted on the current channel (p. 118)  
regardless of the channel that is specified for each controller.  
Also, all messages will be transmitted to the “KEYBOARD PORT SET” (p. 154) regardless of  
the port that is specified for each controller.  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Press the [OMNI] key.  
fig.omn  
The display will blink “OMN”.  
3
4
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will show the current setting.  
Messages will be transmitted on the channel and port  
specified for each controller.  
0
1
OMNI OFF  
OMNI ON  
Messages will be transmitted on the current channel  
from the Keyboard Port, regardless of the channel  
and port specified for each controller.  
5
6
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0] [1] keys to select the mode.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 4 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Edit mode (EDIT)  
PRO TECT  
If you turn the Protect setting ON, All Bulk (p. 151) reception and Save (p. 148) operations will  
be disabled.  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Press the [PROTECT] key.  
fig.ptc  
The display will blink “PTC”.  
3
4
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
The display will show the current setting.  
0
1
PROTECT OFF  
PROTECT ON  
Allow changes.  
Prohibit changes.  
5
6
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0] [1] keys to select the mode.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 5 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Edit mode (EDIT)  
BULK  
Controller assignments can be received or transmitted as bulk data.  
* When you transmit or receive Bulk data, the contents of the current memory will be lost. Save the current  
memory settings as needed before you perform this operation.  
● Receive mode  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Press the [BULK] key.  
fig.blr  
The display will blink “BLR” (Bulk Receive).  
3
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.rs  
The display will indicate “RS”, and the “S” will blink.  
4
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0] [1] keys to select the mode.  
A memory will be received as bulk data.  
0
1
SINGLE BULK  
ALL BULK  
The received data will overwrite the current  
memory. Memories 1–F will not be affected.  
All memories will be received as bulk data.  
The received data will overwrite memories 1–F.  
5
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.rs1  
The third digit of the display will blink, and the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 will wait  
to receive bulk data.  
1 5 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Edit mode (EDIT)  
About the display in Bulk mode  
fig.bulk-dis  
Waiting to receive  
(blinking)  
Receive  
Transmit  
SINGLE  
BULK  
1st digit:  
indicates Receive mode or  
Transmit mode  
3rd digit: indicates  
Transmitting/Receiving/Waiting states  
ALL  
BULK  
Waiting to transmit  
(blinking)  
receiving  
Transmitting  
2nd digit:  
Single Bulk or All Bulk  
transmitting  
6
Transmit bulk data from your sequencer or other device.  
Specify “PCR” (Mac OS 9/ 8: PCR 1) as the MIDI output device for your sequencer software.  
For details on this setting, refer to the manual of your sequencer software.  
For details on the port that will be used to transfer bulk data, refer to “About the ports  
when using a USB connection” (p. 159).  
fig.end  
7
When the PCR finishes receiving the bulk data, the display will  
indicate “END”.  
Error display  
fig.err  
If the data could not be received correctly, the display will blink “ERR”.  
If this occurs, press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the “ERR” display.  
Once "ERR" has been dismissed, perform the bulk reception procedure over again, from step 1.  
8
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
1 5 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● Transmit mode  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Press the [BULK] key.  
3
Press the [1] key.  
fig.blt  
The display will blink “BLT” (Bulk Transmit).  
4
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.ts  
The display will indicate “TS”, and the “S” will blink.  
5
Use the [DEC] [INC] buttons or the [0] [1] keys to select the mode.  
The currently recalled memory (the current  
memory) will be transmitted as bulk data  
0
1
SINGLE BULK  
ALL BULK  
All memories (memories 1–F) will be transmitted  
as bulk data.  
6
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
fig.bs-1  
7
8
The third digit of the display will blink, and the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 will wait  
to transmit bulk data.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
On your sequencer software, specify “PCR 2” as the MIDI input device. For details on this setting,  
refer to the manual of your sequencer software.  
For details on the port that will be used to transfer bulk data, refer to “About the ports  
when using a USB connection” (p. 159).  
fig.end  
9
When the PCR finishes receiving the bulk data, the display will  
indicate “END”.  
10  
Confirm what’s indicated and press the [ENTER] button.  
1 5 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Edit mode (EDIT)  
SYSTEM  
Here’s how you can make various system settings for the PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
fig.edt  
1
Press the [EDIT] button.  
The display will indicate “EDT”.  
2
Press the [SYSTEM] key.  
The display will indicate “SY0”.  
fig.sy0  
3
Use the [0]–[8] keys to specify the System setting that you want to set,  
and then press the [ENTER] button.  
Confirm what’s indicated and use the appropriate method to make  
the setting.  
Key-  
board  
Setting  
method  
A (p. 155)  
Mode  
Content of the setting  
Default  
0
F8 CLOCK ON/ OFF  
Specify whether F8 Clock is to be  
transmitted.  
OFF  
1
F8 CLOCK DEFAULT  
TEMPO  
If “F8 CLOCK ON/ OFF” is ON,  
specify the default value of the F8  
Clock. After the power is turned on,  
this tempo will continue to be output  
until you move a controller to which  
TEMPO is assigned.  
120  
B (p. 155)  
2
3
F8 CLOCK PORT SET  
VELOCITY OFFSET  
If “F8 CLOCK ON/ OFF” is ON,  
specify the port from which the F8  
Clock is to be transmitted.  
PCR 1  
0
C (p. 155)  
B (p. 155)  
The value you specify here will be  
added to the velocity of the notes  
played from the keyboard.  
* If the result of the addition would  
exceed 7FH, the velocity will be 7FH.  
Specify the port from which  
messages produced by the BENDER  
lever of the keyboard are to be  
transmitted.  
4
5
KEYBOARD PORT SET  
H-ACTIVITY ON/ OFF  
PCR 1  
OFF  
C (p. 155)  
A (p. 155)  
Turn this ON if you are using certain  
applications (such as Pro Tools LE).  
When ON, “90 00 7F” will be output  
from PCR 2 approximately every  
500 ms.  
6
7
USB DRIVER MODE  
STARTUP MEMORY  
Specify the type of driver used  
for USB connection.  
Original  
Driver  
GM2  
D (p. 156)  
E (p. 156)  
Specify the memory that will be  
selected when the power is turned  
on.  
8
FACTORY RESET  
Restore all settings of the PCR-30/  
50/ 80 to their factory-set condition.  
-
F (p. 156)  
1 5 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● Setting method A  
Perform steps 1–3.  
4
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0] or [1] keys to switch F8 CLOCK or H-ACTIVITY on/ off.  
0
1
OFF  
ON  
The display will indicate either “ON” or “OFF”.  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
● Setting method B  
Perform steps 1–3.  
4
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify the F8 CLOCK DEFAULT  
TEMPO or the VELOCITY OFFSET value.  
Keyboard  
Mode  
Value range  
20–250  
0–127  
1
3
F8 CLOCK DEFAULT TEMPO  
VELOCITY OFFSET  
The display will indicate the value.  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
● Setting method C  
Perform steps 1–3.  
4
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0]–[F] keys to specify F8 CLOCK PORT SET or  
KEYBOARD PORT SET. (●“Specifying the port” (p. 159))  
The specified port will indicate in the display.  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 5 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Edit mode (EDIT)  
● Setting method D  
Perform steps 1–3.  
4
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0] or [1] keys to specify the USB DRIVER MODE.  
FPT technology is used to perform high-speed  
MIDI transfer. Normally, we recommend that  
you use this mode.  
0
1
Original driver  
Generic driver  
Select this if you are using the standard MIDI  
driver provided by your operating system.  
* FPT = Fast Processing Technology for MIDI Transmission:  
Effective use is made of the USB bandwidth according to the amount of MIDI data to be  
transmitted, ensuring that MIDI data processing will always occur optimally.  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
● Setting method E  
Perform steps 1–3.  
4
Use the [DEC][INC] buttons or the [0] or [1] keys to specify the GM2/ LAST ACCESS  
MEMORY setting.  
When the PCR starts up, memory number 0 (GM2) will  
be loaded into current memory (p. 148) regardless of the  
state in which the power was turned off.  
0
1
GM2 MEMORY  
Upon power-up, the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 will recall the  
memory that was last recalled or saved into current  
memory (p. 148) .  
LAST ACCESS  
MEMORY  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
● Setting method F  
Perform steps 1–3.  
4
The display will indicate “RST”.  
5
Press the [ENTER] button.  
6
7
The display will blink “YES”.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 5 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Ap p e n d ice s  
This section contains troubleshooting information and explanations of convenient functions. You  
may read this material as necessary.  
Convenient functions ........................................................... p. 158  
Memory sets .......................................................................... p. 164  
Troubleshooting.................................................................... p. 170  
MIDI implementation .......................................................... p. 174  
Main specifications............................................................... p. 179  
1 5 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Co n ve n ie n t fu n ctio n s  
Se ttin g th e in p u t m o d e  
fig.hexdec  
If you are not in Play mode, you can use one of two ways to input a numerical value  
into the PCR-30/ 50/ 80; Decimal input mode or Hexadecimal input mode.  
If you want to input decimal numbers, press the [DECIMAL] button. If you want to  
input hexadecimal numbers, press the [HEX] button. When you turn on the power,  
the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 will start up in Decimal mode.  
Decimal and hexadecimal numbers correspond as follows.  
Decimal: ................................................................. 0–127  
Hexadecimal:......................................................... 00–7F  
However, for MIDI CH and PROGRAM CHANGE, the values are as follows.  
Decimal  
1–16  
Hexadecimal  
0–F  
MIDI CH  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
1–128  
00–7F  
*
Normally, the display will show three digits when using Decimal input mode. For this reason, there will  
be no indication of the parameter you are now inputting, and you may lose track of what you are doing.  
If this occurs, you can temporarily switch back to Hexadecimal mode to check the parameter you are  
inputting. Then switch back to Decimal mode and continue.  
Sp e cify in g th e b u tto n m o d e  
When you make Assign settings (p. 126) in Edit mode to assign a message to a button, you must  
specify the operating mode of the button (button mode).  
1 . Press the [0] or [1] key to select either Latch mode or Toggle mode.  
The setting will turn on when you press the button, and off  
when you release it. The button will remain lit while you are  
pressing it.  
0
1
Latch mode  
The setting will alternate on/ off each time you press the  
button. The button will light when an On message is  
transmitted, and will go dark when an Off message is  
transmitted.  
Toggle mode  
2 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
*
When you use a button as a controller, turning the button on will transmit the maximum specified value,  
and turning it off will transmit the minimum value.  
1 5 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Convenient functions  
Sp e cify in g th e p o rt  
When you are making Assign settings (p. 41) in Edit mode and have selected Advanced mode, you  
must specify the USB port to which the message assigned to the controller will be sent when using  
a USB connection.  
1 . Press a key [1]–[3] to select the port.  
1
2
3
PORT 1  
PORT 2  
PORT 1,2  
Messages will be sent to “PCR 1.”  
Messages will be sent to “PCR 2.”  
Messages will be sent to both “PCR 1” and “PCR 2.”  
2 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
*
If you are using the PCR-30/50/80 with a MIDI connection, the messages will be transmitted from the  
MIDI OUT connector regardless of this port setting.  
About the ports when using a USB connection  
The ports correspond to the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 as follows.  
fig.pcr-port  
PCR-30/50  
Bulk reception  
PORT 1  
* As seen from the PCR-30/50/80, each  
section of the diagram does the following.  
PCR-30/50 USB Driver  
USB  
MIDI OUT device (port name)  
EDIROL PCR MIDI OUT  
Bulk reception  
This section receives bulk data  
PORT 1  
Of the keyboard, bender level, and  
controllers, those assigned to PORT 1  
are transmitted from here  
EDIROL PCR  
MIDI IN device (port name)  
EDIROL PCR MIDI IN  
PORT 2  
Of the keyboard, bender level, and  
controllers, those assigned to PORT 2  
are transmitted from here  
EDIROL PCR 1  
EDIROL PCR 2  
PORT 2 /  
Bulk transmission  
Bulk transmission  
This section transmits bulk data  
MIDI OUT device  
PCR MIDI OUT  
Mac OS 9/8 : PCR MIDI IN, OUT  
If you specify PCR MIDI OUT as the output port for your sequencer software, the  
MIDI messages will be sent from the MIDI OUT connector of the PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
This is the Bulk reception port. When receiving bulk data into the PCR-30/ 50/ 80,  
specify PCR as the output port for your sequencer software.  
(
)
)
PCR  
(Mac OS 9/8 : PCR 1)  
MIDI IN device  
PCR MIDI IN  
If you specify PCR MIDI IN as the input port for your sequencer software, MIDI  
messages from the MIDI IN connector of the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 can be received.  
This is the port at which messages from the keyboard, BENDER lever, and control-  
lers will be input.  
(Mac OS 9/8 : PCR MIDI IN, OUT  
The keyboard, BENDER lever, and controllers will be mapped to PCR 1 and/ or  
PCR 2 according to the port setting.  
PCR 1  
PCR 2  
You may find it convenient to specify PCR 1 for messages used to play a software  
synthesizer or for realtime recording on a sequencer track, and specify PCR 2 for  
messages used to control the sequencer, such as sequencer play/ stop or track fader  
control. PCR 2 is the bulk transmission port. When transmitting bulk data from the  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80, specify PCR 2 as the input port for your sequencer software.  
1 5 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Convenient functions  
Sy s Ex . ASSIGN ite m s  
● Specifying the checksum  
The PCR-30/ 50/ 80 can automatically calculate the checksum of a system exclusive message and  
embed it in the message. In order to use this function, you must use the following procedure to  
specify the starting location from which the checksum is calculated, and the location at which the  
checksum is inserted. You can also select the type of checksum.  
For an actual example, please read the Sys Ex.ASSIGN section “Bend Pitch Control” (p. 144)  
1 . Press the [CHECKSUM] key before you input the byte at which checksum calculation should begin.  
fig.css  
The display will indicate “CSS” (Checksum Start).  
If you press the [CHECKSUM] key once again, “CSS” (Checksum  
Start) will be cancelled.  
2 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
3 . Continue inputting data.  
4 . Press the [CHECKSUM] key at the location where the checksum should be inserted.  
fig.cs1  
The display will indicate “CS1” (Checksum type 1).  
5 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
Checksum types  
There are two types of checksum, as follows.  
CHECKSUM  
TYPE 1  
This is the method used by Roland and most other  
manufacturers  
1
CHECKSUM  
TYPE 2  
2
Select this if the method other than type 1 is used  
Switching the type  
If you want to switch to type 2,  
press the [2] key after you press  
[CHECKSUM] in step 4. To switch  
back to type 1, press the [1] key.  
[CHECKSUM]  
[2]  
[1]  
[CHECKSUM]  
*1  
1 6 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Convenient functions  
● Specifying the location of the data  
Here’s how to specify the location and data type of the variable portion (data) within a system  
exclusive message.  
The range of data values will be the default range in the case of Basic mode or Advanced mode 3.  
In the case of Advanced modes 1 and 4, you can specify the range of data values.  
For an actual example, please read the Sys Ex,ASSIGN section “Master Volume” (p. 143).  
1 . Press the [DATA] key at the location where you want to input the data.  
The display will indicate “DT0”.  
2 . Use the [0]–[4] keys to select the type of data.  
Data  
number  
Example  
(specified upper/lower limits)  
Data type  
Default range  
Target of range setting  
Specify the range of data  
(00–7FH)  
04–45  
7bit  
00H–7F  
DT0  
(lower limit 4H, upper limit 45H)  
Specify the range of the first  
byte (0–FH), second byte is  
fixed at 0–FH  
0/ 0–D/ F  
(lower limit 0H, upper limit DH)  
4bit/ 4bit  
0H/ 0H–FH/ FH  
DT1  
7bit/ 7bit  
(MSB/ LSB)  
7bit/ 7bit  
(LSB/ MSB)  
Specify the MSB range (00–7F),  
LSB is fixed at 00–7F  
Specify the MSB range (00–7F),  
LSB is fixed at 00–7F  
23/ 00–68/ 7F  
(lower limit 23H, upper limit 68H)  
00/ 23–7F/ 68  
(lower limit 23H, upper limit 68H)  
00H/ 00H–7FH/ 7FH  
00H/ 00H–7FH/ 7FH  
DT2  
DT3  
Specify the limits of positive/  
negative change as a value  
from 00H to FFH, centered on  
8000H.  
4bit/ 4bit/  
4bit/ 4bit  
7H/ FH/ 0H/ 1H–  
8H/ 0H/ FH/ FH  
7/ F/ 0/ 2–8/ 0/ 5/ 0  
(lower limit FEH, upper limit 50H)  
DT4  
max  
min  
8000H  
FF  
FF  
*
In the case of DT1--DT4 (data consisting of two or more bytes), a data location will automatically be  
allocated for the next byte, and "-DT" will be displayed. (This cannot be changed.)  
3 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
4 . If you selected DT1 through DT4, the display will indicate “-DT”.  
Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 6 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Convenient functions  
● Inputting channel/block data  
If a system exclusive message includes a channel or GS block number, here’s how to specify the  
type and the value of the upper bits. For the channel and block number, the setting of the current  
channel (p. 118) will be inserted as the lower bits. (The block number is not actually a channel, but  
corresponds to the “part” within a GS sound module. On the PCR-30/ 50/ 80, this corresponds to  
the channel for the sake of convenience.)  
Current  
channel  
CH  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
0
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
BL  
For an actual example, refer to “Bend Pitch Control” (p. 144) in the section on the Edit Mode.  
1 . Press the [DATA] key several times at the location where you want to input the channel/ block  
number, to select “0CH” for the channel or “0BL” for the block.  
fig.csbl  
[DATA]  
[DATA]  
[DATA]  
[DATA]  
2 . Use the [0]–[7] keys to input the value of the upper four bits.  
The “0” in the display will change to the numerical value that you input.  
3 . Press the [ENTER] button.  
1 6 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Convenient functions  
V-LIN K m o d e  
When you press the [V-LINK] button, the  
PCR will transmit a V-LINK ON message  
and will enter V-LINK mode. When you  
press the [V-LINK] button once again, the  
PCR will transmit a V-LINK OFF message  
and will exit V-LINK mode.  
Pro-  
gram  
Change  
1
Bank  
Select  
MSB  
Note  
Number  
C2  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
C#2  
D2  
D#2  
E2  
F2  
F#2  
G2  
G#2  
A2  
A#2  
B2  
0
1
2
When the PCR enters V-LINK mode, it will  
transmit the following parameters to the  
V-LINK host.  
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
• Clip Ctrl Rx MIDI ch : 16  
• Color Ctrl Rx MIDI ch : 16  
• Sender Model Name : EDIROL PCR  
7
8
C3  
C#3  
D3  
D#3  
E3  
F3  
F#3  
G3  
G#3  
A3  
A#3  
B3  
5
6
In V-LINK mode, the PCR will operate as  
follows.  
9
10  
11  
• Messages from the PCR itself will be  
transmitted to both the MIDI connector  
and the USB connector.  
7
8
9
12  
13  
* In V-LINK mode, you cannot use the MIDI  
connectors as a USB MIDI interface.  
• When you play the keyboard, program  
change messages or bank select MSB  
messages will be transmitted in addition  
to note messages.  
14  
15  
C4  
C#4  
D4  
D#4  
E4  
F4  
F#4  
G4  
G#4  
A4  
A#4  
B4  
10  
11  
16  
* The program change messages and bank  
select MSB messages will be transmitted  
on channel 16.  
17  
18  
12  
13  
14  
19  
20  
21  
22  
C5  
C#5  
D5  
D#5  
E5  
F5  
F#5  
G5  
G#5  
A5  
A#5  
B5  
15  
16  
23  
24  
25  
17  
18  
19  
26  
27  
28  
29  
C6  
C#6  
D6  
D#6  
E6  
30  
31  
21  
F6  
1 6 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Me m o ry se ts  
With the factory settings, the GM2 set shown in the illustration is assigned to the controllers.  
Use the included template.  
The following memory sets are also provided.  
GM2 set (MEMORY: 0).............................................(p. 164)  
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) SET.............................(p. 165)  
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - A (MEMORY: 1)..........(p. 165)  
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - B (MEMORY: 2) ..........(p. 165)  
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - C (MEMORY: 3)..........(p. 165)  
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - D (MEMORY: 4)..........(p. 165)  
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) SET ......................(p. 166)  
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/ SX) - A (MEMORY: 5)....(p. 166)  
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/ SX) - B (MEMORY: 6) ....(p. 166)  
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/ SX) - C (MEMORY: 7)....(p. 166)  
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/ SX) - D (MEMORY: 8)....(p. 166)  
H-COMPATIBLE (ProTools LE, Digital Performer) SET  
(MEMORY: 9)............................................................. (p. 167)  
GS SET........................................................................ (p. 167)  
GS-A (MEMORY: A) ...................................................... (p. 167)  
GS-B (MEMORY: B)........................................................ (p. 168)  
GS-C (MEMORY: C)....................................................... (p. 168)  
XG SET........................................................................ (p. 169)  
XG-A (MEMORY: D)...................................................... (p. 169)  
XG-B (MEMORY: E)....................................................... (p. 169)  
For details on settings for actually using each memory set with your application, refer to the Read Me file for each memory set, located in the  
Memory Files folder of the CD-ROM.  
You can download the latest additional memory sets from the following website.  
● GM2 set (MEMORY: 0)  
fig.gm2-tmp  
Por  
Parameter  
Message (Hex.)  
Range (Hex.)  
Ch.  
t
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
R1  
R2  
R3  
R4  
R5  
R6  
R7  
R8  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
B5  
B6  
L1  
L2  
L3  
P1  
P2  
FILTER CUTOFF  
CC 74(4A)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0/ -(00/ --) - 127/ -(7F/ --)  
0/ 0(00/ 00) - 127/ 127(7F/ 7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
min:1(00)  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
FILTER RESONANCE  
VIBRATO RATE  
VIBRATO DEPTH  
VIBRATO DELAY  
COARSE TUNING  
FINE TUNING  
CC 71(47)  
CC 76(4C)  
CC 77(4D)  
CC 78(4E)  
RPN 0/ 2(00/ 02)  
RPN 0/ 1(00/ 01)  
CC 10(0A)  
CC 5(05)  
PAN (CHANNEL)  
PORTAMENTO TIME  
AFTERTOUCH  
CHANNEL PRESSURE  
CC 73(49)  
ENVELOPE ATTACK  
ENVELOPE DECAY  
ENVELOPE RELEASE  
CHORUS  
CC 75(4B)  
CC 72(48)  
CC 93(5D)  
CC 91(5B)  
REVERB  
VOLUME (CHANNEL)  
PROGRAM CHANGE DEC  
PROGRAM CHANGE INC  
PORTAMENTO ON/ OFF  
POLY MODE ON  
MONO MODE ON  
GM2 SYSTEM ON  
STOP  
CC 7(07)  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
CC 65(41)  
max:128(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
-
-
-
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
B0 7F 00  
B0 7E 01  
-
F0 7E 7F 09 03 F7  
FC  
-
-
-
START  
FA  
-
-
CONTINUE  
FB  
-
-
HOLD  
CC 64(40)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1
1
EXPRESSION  
CC 11(0B)  
1 6 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Memory sets  
● MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) SET  
When using this memory set, turn the PCR-30/ 50/ 80's OMNI (p. 149) setting OFF.  
* To display the external controller toolbar, open Display | Toolbars, and select External Controllers.  
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - A (MEMORY: 1)  
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - B (MEMORY: 2)  
Message  
(Hex.)  
Message  
(Hex.)  
Parameter  
Range (Hex.) Ch. Port  
Parameter  
Range (Hex.) Ch. Port  
R1 TRACK 1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
R1 TRACK 1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
R2 TRACK 2  
R3 TRACK 3  
R4 TRACK 4  
R5 TRACK 5  
R6 TRACK 6  
R7 TRACK 7  
R8 TRACK 8  
R2 TRACK 2  
R3 TRACK 3  
R4 TRACK 4  
R5 TRACK 5  
R6 TRACK 6  
R7 TRACK 7  
R8 TRACK 8  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
TRACK 1  
TRACK 2  
TRACK 3  
TRACK 4  
TRACK 5  
TRACK 6  
TRACK 7  
TRACK 8  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
TRACK 1  
TRACK 2  
TRACK 3  
TRACK 4  
TRACK 5  
TRACK 6  
TRACK 7  
TRACK 8  
B1 TRACK 1  
B2 TRACK 2  
B3 TRACK 3  
B4 TRACK 4  
B5 TRACK 5  
B6 TRACK 6  
L1 <<  
L2 ● Stop  
L3 > Play  
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
B1 TRACK 1  
B2 TRACK 2  
B3 TRACK 3  
B4 TRACK 4  
B5 TRACK 5  
B6 TRACK 6  
L1 <<  
L2 ● Stop  
L3 > Play  
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
6
13  
14  
15  
1
13  
14  
15  
1
1
1
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - C (MEMORY: 3)  
MCR-8 MODE 3(SONAR 2) - D (MEMORY: 4)  
Message  
(Hex.)  
Message  
(Hex.)  
Parameter  
Range (Hex.) Ch. Port  
Parameter  
Range (Hex.) Ch. Port  
R1 TRACK 9  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 80(50)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
9
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
R1 TRACK 9  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*1  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 16(10)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 17(11)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 81(51)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 82(52)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
9
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
R2 TRACK 10  
R3 TRACK 11  
R4 TRACK 12  
R5 TRACK 13  
R6 TRACK 14  
R7 TRACK 15  
R8 TRACK 16  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
12  
14  
11  
1
R2 TRACK 10  
R3 TRACK 11  
R4 TRACK 12  
R5 TRACK 13  
R6 TRACK 14  
R7 TRACK 15  
R8 TRACK 16  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
12  
14  
11  
1
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
TRACK 9  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
TRACK 9  
TRACK 10  
TRACK 11  
TRACK 12  
TRACK 13  
TRACK 14  
TRACK 15  
TRACK 16  
TRACK 10  
TRACK 11  
TRACK 12  
TRACK 13  
TRACK 14  
TRACK 15  
TRACK 16  
B1 TRACK 9  
B2 TRACK 10  
B3 TRACK 11  
B4 TRACK 12  
B5 TRACK 13  
B6 TRACK 14  
L1 Automation Write  
L2 ● Stop  
L3 Rec  
B1 TRACK 9  
B2 TRACK 10  
B3 TRACK 11  
B4 TRACK 12  
B5 TRACK 13  
B6 TRACK 14  
L1 Automation Write  
L2 ● Stop  
L3 Rec  
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
1
1
Generic Surface Preset  
Roland MCR-8 (Aux Send 1)  
Roland MCR-8 (Aux Send 2)  
Roland MCR-8 (Mute + Solo)  
Roland MCR-8 (Record Arming)  
*1  
*2  
*3  
*4  
Aux Send 1 Enable  
Aux Send 2 Enable  
Solo  
Aux Send 1 Pan  
Aux Send 2 Pan  
Pan  
Aux Send 1 Level  
Aux Send 2 Level  
Volume  
Aux Send 1 Pre/ Post  
Aux Send 2 Pre/ Post  
Mute  
Pan  
Volume  
White Arm  
Record Arm  
1 6 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Memory sets  
● MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) SET  
When using this memory set, turn the PCR-30/ 50/ 80's OMNI (p. 149) setting OFF.  
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - A (MEMORY: 5) MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - B (MEMORY: 6)  
Message  
(Hex.)  
Message  
(Hex.)  
Parameter  
Range (Hex.) Ch. Port  
Parameter  
Range (Hex.) Ch. Port  
R1 TRACK 1 PAN  
R2 TRACK 2 PAN  
R3 TRACK 3 PAN  
R4 TRACK 4 PAN  
R5 TRACK 5 PAN  
R6 TRACK 6 PAN  
R7 TRACK 7 PAN  
R8 TRACK 8 PAN  
CC 72(48)  
CC 73(49)  
CC 74(4A)  
CC 75(4B)  
CC 76(4C)  
CC 77(4D)  
CC 78(4E)  
CC 79(4F)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 65(41)  
CC 66(42)  
CC 67(43)  
CC 68(44)  
CC 69(45)  
CC 70(46)  
CC 71(47)  
CC 0(00)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
R1 TRACK 1 PAN  
R2 TRACK 2 PAN  
R3 TRACK 3 PAN  
R4 TRACK 4 PAN  
R5 TRACK 5 PAN  
R6 TRACK 6 PAN  
R7 TRACK 7 PAN  
R8 TRACK 8 PAN  
CC 72(48)  
CC 73(49)  
CC 74(4A)  
CC 75(4B)  
CC 76(4C)  
CC 77(4D)  
CC 78(4E)  
CC 79(4F)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 65(41)  
CC 66(42)  
CC 67(43)  
CC 68(44)  
CC 69(45)  
CC 70(46)  
CC 71(47)  
CC 40(28)  
CC 41(29)  
CC 42(2A)  
CC 43(2B)  
CC 44(2C)  
CC 45(2D)  
CC 19(13)  
CC 21(15)  
CC 22(16)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
TRACK 1 FADER  
TRACK 2 FADER  
TRACK 3 FADER  
TRACK 4 FADER  
TRACK 5 FADER  
TRACK 6 FADER  
TRACK 7 FADER  
TRACK 8 FADER  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
TRACK 1 FADER  
TRACK 2 FADER  
TRACK 3 FADER  
TRACK 4 FADER  
TRACK 5 FADER  
TRACK 6 FADER  
TRACK 7 FADER  
TRACK 8 FADER  
B1 TRACK 1 SOLO  
B2 TRACK 2 SOLO  
B3 TRACK 3 SOLO  
B4 TRACK 4 SOLO  
B5 TRACK 5 SOLO  
B6 TRACK 6 SOLO  
L1 <<  
L2 ● Stop  
L3 > Play  
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
B1 TRACK 1 MUTE  
B2 TRACK 2 MUTE  
B3 TRACK 3 MUTE  
B4 TRACK 4 MUTE  
B5 TRACK 5 MUTE  
B6 TRACK 6 MUTE  
L1 <<  
L2 ● Stop  
L3 > Play  
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
CC 1(01)  
CC 2(02)  
CC 3(03)  
CC 4(04)  
CC 5(05)  
CC 19(13)  
CC 21(15)  
CC 22(16)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
1
1
MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - C (MEMORY: 7) MCR-8 MODE 4(Cubase 5/SX) - D (MEMORY: 8)  
Message  
(Hex.)  
Message  
(Hex.)  
Parameter  
Range (Hex.) Ch. Port  
Parameter  
Range (Hex.) Ch. Port  
R1 TRACK 9 PAN  
R2 TRACK 10 PAN  
R3 TRACK 11 PAN  
R4 TRACK 12 PAN  
R5 TRACK 13 PAN  
R6 TRACK 14 PAN  
R7 TRACK 15 PAN  
R8 TRACK 16 PAN  
CC 56(38)  
CC 57(39)  
CC 58(3A)  
CC 59(3B)  
CC 60(3C)  
CC 61(3D)  
CC 62(3E)  
CC 63(3F)  
CC 48(30)  
CC 49(31)  
CC 50(32)  
CC 51(33)  
CC 52(34)  
CC 53(35)  
CC 54(36)  
CC 55(37)  
CC 32(20)  
CC 33(21)  
CC 34(22)  
CC 35(23)  
CC 36(24)  
CC 37(25)  
CC 20(14)  
CC 21(15)  
CC 23(17)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
R1 TRACK 9 PAN  
R2 TRACK 10 PAN  
R3 TRACK 11 PAN  
R4 TRACK 12 PAN  
R5 TRACK 13 PAN  
R6 TRACK 14 PAN  
R7 TRACK 15 PAN  
R8 TRACK 16 PAN  
CC 56(38)  
CC 57(39)  
CC 58(3A)  
CC 59(3B)  
CC 60(3C)  
CC 61(3D)  
CC 62(3E)  
CC 63(3F)  
CC 48(30)  
CC 49(31)  
CC 50(32)  
CC 51(33)  
CC 52(34)  
CC 53(35)  
CC 54(36)  
CC 55(37)  
CC 88(58)  
CC 89(59)  
CC 90(5A)  
CC 91(5B)  
CC 92(5C)  
CC 93(5D)  
CC 20(14)  
CC 21(15)  
CC 23(17)  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
TRACK 9 FADER  
TRACK 10 FADER  
TRACK 11 FADER  
TRACK 12 FADER  
TRACK 13 FADER  
TRACK 14 FADER  
TRACK 15 FADER  
TRACK 16 FADER  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
TRACK 9 FADER  
TRACK 10 FADER  
TRACK 11 FADER  
TRACK 12 FADER  
TRACK 13 FADER  
TRACK 14 FADER  
TRACK 15 FADER  
TRACK 16 FADER  
B1 TRACK 9 SOLO  
B2 TRACK 10 SOLO  
B3 TRACK 11 SOLO  
B4 TRACK 12 SOLO  
B5 TRACK 13 SOLO  
B6 TRACK 14 SOLO  
L1 <<  
L2 ● Stop  
L3 Rec  
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
B1 TRACK 9 MUTE  
B2 TRACK 10 MUTE  
B3 TRACK 11 MUTE  
B4 TRACK 12 MUTE  
B5 TRACK 13 MUTE  
B6 TRACK 14 MUTE  
L1 <<  
L2 ● Stop  
L3 Rec  
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
1
1
1 6 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Memory sets  
●
H-COMPATIBLE (ProTools LE, Digital Performer) SET (MEMORY: 9)  
When using this memory set, turn the PCR-30/ 50/ 80's OMNI (p. 149) setting OFF, and turn the  
H-ACTIVITY (p. 154) setting ON.  
Parameter  
R1 ROTARY ENCODER 1  
R2 ROTARY ENCODER 2  
R3 ROTARY ENCODER 3  
R4 ROTARY ENCODER 4  
R5 ROTARY ENCODER 5  
R6 ROTARY ENCODER 6  
R7 ROTARY ENCODER 7  
R8 ROTARY ENCODER 8  
Message (Hex.)  
Range (Hex.)  
DEC(01) / INC(41)  
DEC(01) / INC(41)  
DEC(01) / INC(41)  
DEC(01) / INC(41)  
DEC(01) / INC(41)  
DEC(01) / INC(41)  
DEC(01) / INC(41)  
DEC(01) / INC(41)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
ON(42) / OFF(02)  
ON(43) / OFF(03)  
ON(47) / OFF(07)  
ON(44) / OFF(04)  
ON(40) / OFF(00)  
ON(42) / OFF(02)  
ON(41) / OFF(01)  
ON(43) / OFF(03)  
ON(44) / OFF(04)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
Ch.  
Port  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
B0 40 dd  
B0 41 dd  
B0 42 dd  
B0 43 dd  
B0 44 dd  
B0 45 dd  
B0 46 dd  
B0 47 dd  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
FADER 1  
FADER 2  
FADER 3  
FADER 4  
FADER 5  
FADER 6  
FADER 7  
FADER 8  
B0 0F 00 B0 2F 40 B0 00 dd B0 20 00 B0 0F 00 B0 2F 00  
B0 0F 01 B0 2F 40 B0 01 dd B0 21 00 B0 0F 01 B0 2F 00  
B0 0F 02 B0 2F 40 B0 02 dd B0 22 00 B0 0F 02 B0 2F 00  
B0 0F 03 B0 2F 40 B0 03 dd B0 23 00 B0 0F 03 B0 2F 00  
B0 0F 04 B0 2F 40 B0 04 dd B0 24 00 B0 0F 04 B0 2F 00  
B0 0F 05 B0 2F 40 B0 05 dd B0 25 00 B0 0F 05 B0 2F 00  
B0 0F 06 B0 2F 40 B0 06 dd B0 26 00 B0 0F 06 B0 2F 00  
B0 0F 07 B0 2F 40 B0 07 dd B0 27 00 B0 0F 07 B0 2F 00  
B0 0F 00 B0 2F dd  
B1 MUTE 1  
B2 SOLO 1  
B3 REC 1  
B4 WRITE 1  
B5 TRACK <  
B6 TRACK >  
L1 REWIND  
L2 STOP  
B0 0F 00 B0 2F dd  
B0 0F 00 B0 2F dd  
B0 0F 00 B0 2F dd  
B0 0F 0A B0 2F dd  
B0 0F 0A B0 2F dd  
B0 0F 0E B0 2F dd  
B0 0F 0E B0 2F dd  
B0 0F 0E B0 2F dd  
L3 PLAY  
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
2
1
1
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
● GS SET  
When using this memory set, you will find it convenient to turn the PCR-30/ 50/ 80's OMNI (p. 149)  
setting ON.  
GS-A (MEMORY: A)  
Parameter  
R1 REVERB MACRO  
R2 REVERB CHARACTER  
R3 REVERB PRE-LPF  
R4 REVERB TIME  
R5 REVERB PREDELAY TIME  
R6 REVERB DELAY FEEDBACK  
R7 REVERB LEVEL  
Message (Hex.)  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 30 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 31 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 32 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 34 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 37 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 35 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 33 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 30 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 31 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 37 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 34 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 35 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 36 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 22 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 19 dd SUM F7  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
Range (Hex.))  
0(00) - 7(07)  
0(00) - 7(07)  
Ch.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
-
-
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
-
-
Port  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
1
1
1
1
2
0(00) - 7(07)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1(01) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
min:1 (00)  
R8 PART PANPOT  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
VIBRATO RATE  
VIBRATO DEPTH  
VIBRATO DELAY  
TVF&TVA ENV.ATTACK  
TVF&TVA ENV.DECAY  
TVF&TVA ENV.RELEASE  
REVERB SEND LEVEL  
PART LEVEL  
B1 PROGRAM CHANGE DEC  
B2 PROGRAM CHANGE INC  
B3 NRPN ON/ OFF  
B4 RANDOM PAN  
B5 MODE POLY/ MONO  
B6 GS RESET  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
max:128 (7F)  
OFF(00) / ON(01)  
-
MONO(00) / POLY(01)  
-
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 0A dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C 00 SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 13 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7  
FC  
L1 STOP  
-
L2 START  
FA  
-
-
2
L3 CONTINUE  
FB  
-
-
2
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1
1
1
1
1 6 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Memory sets  
GS-B (MEMORY: B)  
Parameter  
Message (Hex.)  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 38 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 39 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3C dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3D dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3E dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3B dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3A dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 3F dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 40 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 32 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 33 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 2x 04 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 2x 10 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 21 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 19 dd SUM F7  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
Range (Hex.)  
0(00) - 7(07)  
0(00) - 7(07)  
Ch.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
-
-
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
-
-
Port  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
1
1
1
1
2
R1 CHORUS MACRO  
R2 CHORUS PRE-LPF  
R3 CHORUS DELAY  
R4 CHORUS RATE  
R5 CHORUS DEPTH  
R6 CHORUS FEEDBACK  
R7 CHORUS LEVEL  
R8 PART PANPOT  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1(01) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
64(40) - 88(58)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
min:1 (00)  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
CHORUS SEND LEVEL TO REVERB  
CHORUS SEND LEVEL TO DELAY  
TVF CUTOFF FREQ  
TVF RESONANCE  
MODULATION DEPTH  
BEND RANGE  
CHORUS SEND LEVEL  
PART LEVEL  
B1 PROGRAM CHANGE DEC  
B2 PROGRAM CHANGE INC  
B3 NRPN ON/ OFF  
B4 RANDOM PAN  
B5 MODE POLY/ MONO  
B6 GS RESET  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
max:128 (7F)  
OFF(00) / ON(01)  
-
MONO(00) / POLY(01)  
-
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 0A dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C 00 SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 13 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7  
FC  
L1 STOP  
-
L2 START  
FA  
-
-
2
L3 CONTINUE  
FB  
-
-
2
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1
1
1
1
GS-C (MEMORY: C)  
Parameter  
R1 DELAY MACRO  
R2 DELAY PRE-LPF  
R3 DELAY TIME RATIO LEFT  
R4 DELAY TIME CENTER  
R5 DELAY TIME RATIO RIGHT  
R6 DELAY FEEDBACK  
R7 DELAY LEVEL  
Message (Hex.)  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 50 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 51 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 53 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 52 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 54 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 59 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 58 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 5A dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 56 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 55 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 01 57 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 02 01 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 02 03 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 2C dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 19 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 4x 20 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 02 00 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 02 02 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 1C 00 SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 1x 13 dd SUM F7  
F0 41 10 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7  
FC  
Range (Hex.)  
0(00) - 9(09)  
0(00) - 7(07)  
Ch.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
BLOCK  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Port  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1(01) - 120(78)  
1(01) - 115(73)  
1(01) - 120(78)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1(01) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
22(34) - 64(40) - 76(4C)  
22(34) - 64(40) - 76(4C)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
OFF(00) / ON(01)  
200Hz(00) / 400Hz(01)  
3kHz(00) / 6kHz(01)  
-
R8 PART PANPOT  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
DELAY SEND LEVEL TO REVERB  
DELAY LEVEL LEFT  
DELAY LEVEL CENTER  
DELAY LEVEL RIGHT  
EQ LOW GAIN  
EQ HIGH GAIN  
DELAY SEND LEVEL  
PART LEVEL  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
-
B1 EQ ON / OFF  
B2 EQ LOW FREQ (200Hz/ 400Hz)  
B3 EQ HIGH FREQ (3kHz/ 6kHz)  
B4 RANDOM PAN  
B5 MODE POLY/ MONO  
B6 GS RESET  
-
BLOCK  
BLOCK  
-
-
MONO(00) / POLY(01)  
-
L1 STOP  
-
L2 START  
FA  
-
-
2
L3 CONTINUE  
FB  
-
-
2
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1
1
1
1
1 6 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Memory sets  
● XG SET  
When using this memory set, you will find it convenient to turn the PCR-30/ 50/ 80's OMNI (p. 149)  
setting ON.  
XG-A (MEMORY: D)  
Parameter  
R1 BEND PITCH CONTROL  
R2 BEND FILTER CONTROL  
R3 BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL  
R4 PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL  
R5 PITCH EG ATTACK TIME  
R6 PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL  
R7 PITCH EG RELEASE TIME  
R8 PAN  
Message (Hex.)  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 23 dd F7  
Range (Hex.)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
1(01) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
min:1 (00)  
Ch.  
Port  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
1
1
1
1
2
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
-
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 24 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 25 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 69 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 6A dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 6B dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 6C dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0E dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 26 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 27 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 28 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 13 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 12 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 14 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 11 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0B dd F7  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 07 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0E 00 F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 05 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7  
FC  
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH  
BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH  
BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH  
REVERB SEND  
CHORUS SEND  
VARIATION SEND  
DRY LEVEL  
VOLUME  
B1 PROGRAM CHANGE DEC  
B2 PROGRAM CHANGE INC  
B3 PART MODE NORMAL/ DRUM  
B4 RANDOM PAN  
B5 MONO/ POLY MODE  
B6 XG SYSTEM ON  
L1 STOP  
max:128 (7F)  
OFF(00) / ON(01)  
-
MONO(00) / POLY(01)  
-
-
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
-
-
-
L2 START  
FA  
-
-
2
L3 CONTINUE  
FB  
-
-
2
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1
1
1
1
XG-B (MEMORY: E)  
Parameter  
R1 MW PITCH CONTROL  
R2 MW FILTER CONTROL  
R3 MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL  
R4 REVERB PAN  
R5 CHORUS PAN  
R6 VARIATION PAN  
R7 SEND VARIATION TO REVERB  
R8 SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS F0 43 10 4C 02 01 59 dd F7  
Message (Hex.)  
Range (Hex.)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 64(40) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
min:1 (00)  
Ch.  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
Port  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
1
1
1
1
2
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 1D dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 1E dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 1F dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 0D dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 2D dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 57 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 58 dd F7  
-
-
-
-
-
S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
S6  
S7  
S8  
MW LFO PMOD DEPTH  
MW LFO FMOD DEPTH  
MW LFO AMOD DEPTH  
REVERB RETURN  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 20 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 21 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 22 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 0C dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 2C dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 56 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 02 01 2E dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0B dd F7  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
PROGRAM CHANGE  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 07 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 0E 00 F7  
F0 43 10 4C 08 0ch 05 dd F7  
F0 43 10 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7  
FC  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
-
-
-
-
CHORUS RETURN  
VARIATION RETURN  
SEND CHORUS TO REVERB  
VOLUME  
CURRENT CH  
B1 PROGRAM CHANGE DEC  
B2 PROGRAM CHANGE INC  
B3 PART MODE NORMAL/ DRUM  
B4 RANDOM PAN  
B5 MONO/ POLY MODE  
B6 XG SYSTEM ON  
L1 STOP  
-
-
max:128 (7F)  
OFF(00) / ON(01)  
-
MONO(00) / POLY(01)  
-
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
CURRENT CH  
-
-
-
L2 START  
FA  
-
-
2
L3 CONTINUE  
FB  
-
-
2
P1 HOLD  
P2 EXPRESSION  
CC 64(40)  
CC 11(0B)  
0(00) / 127(7F)  
0(00) - 127(7F)  
1
1
1
1
1 6 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Tro u b le sh o o tin g  
Problems common to Windows and Macintosh  
Problems occurring only in Windows  
Problems occurring only in Macintosh  
Pro b le m s re la te d to th e USB d rive r  
Cannot install the driver correctly  
•
Is the CD-ROM correctly inserted into your CD-ROM drive?  
Installation is not possible unless the CD-ROM included with the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is inserted in your  
CD-ROM drive. Make sure that the CD-ROM is correctly inserted into your CD-ROM drive.  
•
Is the CD-ROM or the lens of the CD-ROM dirty?  
If the CD-ROM or the lens of the CD-ROM drive is dirty, the installer may not work correctly. Clean  
the disc and/ or lens using a commercially-available CD cleaner or lens cleaner.  
•
•
Are you installing the software from a networked CD-ROM drive?  
The software cannot be installed from a networked CD-ROM drive.  
Is there sufficient free space on your hard disk?  
Delete unneeded files to increase the amount of free space. After deleting the unneeded files, empty  
the recycling bin.  
•
Is the PCR-30/50/80 connected correctly?  
Make sure that the USB connector of your computer is connected to the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 by a USB  
cable.  
•
•
Is the power of the PCR-30/50/80 turned on?  
The power switch of the PCR-30/50/80 may have been set to the USB position.  
Make sure that the power switch of the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is set to the DC position. Do not use bus  
power while installing the driver. Check this, and if you are using Windows, close the Sound and  
Multimedia Properties dialog box (Sounds and Audio Devices Properties in Windows XP, and  
Multimedia Properties in Windows 98), re-open the same dialog box once again, and specify the  
MIDI input/ output destinations.  
•
Using the procedure for “Deleting the driver” (p. 173), delete the USB audio device driver  
installed in your computer, and then re-install the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 driver as described in “Setup”  
(p. 13). Also check whether there is any “Other devices” in “Device Manager” or “Unknown  
device” in “Universal Serial Bus Controllers”. If you find any, delete them.  
1 7 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
•
Is OMS or FreeMIDI installed?  
The PCR-30/ 50/ 80 driver cannot be installed unless OMS or FreeMIDI are installed. Please install  
OMS or FreeMIDI. ( ● “Installing & Setting Up the Driver (Macintosh)” (p. 25))  
PCR-30/50/80 is not detected when making OMS or FreeMIDI  
settings  
•
Is the PCR-30/50/80 detected?  
Turn the power of the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 off, then on again.  
Reconnect the USB cable.  
If other USB devices are connected, connect only the PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
It is possible that the Macintosh did not correctly detect and initialize the PCR-30/ 50/ 80. Leave the  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80’s USB cable connected, and restart your Macintosh. If it is still not detected, shut  
down your Macintosh, and then restart it.  
The PCR-30/ 50/ 80 will not be detected if it is connected to the USB connector on the Macintosh  
keyboard.  
Please connect the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 to a USB connector on the Macintosh itself.  
“Find new hardware wizard” does not execute automatically  
The “Insert Disk” dialog box does not appear  
“Find new hardware wizard” ends before the process is  
completed  
•
It may take about 15 seconds (or more) after the USB cable is connected for the PCR-30/50/80  
to be detected.  
•
Is the USB cable connected correctly?  
Make sure that the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 and your computer are correctly connected via a USB cable.  
•
•
Is USB enabled on your computer?  
Refer to the operation manual for your computer, and make sure that USB is enabled.  
It has been found that in some cases, not all of the Windows 98 files required to support  
audio via USB are installed when a computer is shipped.  
Please contact the manufacturer of your computer.  
•
Does your computer meet the USB specifications?  
If you are using a computer that does not fulfill the electrical requirements of the USB  
specifications, operation may be unstable. In this case, you may be able to solve the problem by  
connecting a USB hub.  
If the above actions do not solve the problem, it is possible that the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 has been  
incorrectly detected by the computer. Please reinstall the driver from the beginning of the  
procedure. (●“Setup” (p. 13))  
1 7 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
“Found unknown device” appears even though you installed  
the driver  
If your computer or USB hub has two or more USB connectors, and you connect the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 to  
a USB connector to which the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 has never been connected before, the “Unknown device”  
dialog box may appear even on a computer onto which you have already installed the driver.  
Refer to “Setup” (p. 13), and install the driver once again. This is not a malfunction.  
If the "Found unknown device" dialog box appears even though the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is connected to  
the same USB connector as before, it is possible that the computer has detected the PCR-30/ 50/ 80  
incorrectly. Please reinstall the driver from the beginning of the procedure. (●“Setup” (p. 13))  
An “Unknown driver found” dialog box appears, and you are  
unable to install the driver  
Device Manager shows “?”, “!”, or “USB Composite Device”  
Driver is not installed correctly  
It is possible that the computer has detected the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 incorrectly. Please reinstall the  
driver from the beginning of the procedure. (●“Setup” (p. 13))  
Can’t install/delete/use the driver in Windows XP/2000  
•
•
Did you log on to Windows as a user with administrative privileges?  
In order to install/ delete/ re-install the driver in Windows XP/ 2000, you must be logged into  
Windows as a user with administrative privileges, such as Administrator. For details, please  
contact the system administrator for your computer system.  
Did you make “Driver Signing Options”?  
In order to install/ re-install the driver, you must make “Driver Signing Options”.  
(Windows XP ● p. 14, Windows 2000 ● p. 18)  
Windows XP/2000 displays a “Hardware Installation” or “Digital  
Signature Not Found” dialog box  
•
Did you make “Driver Signing Options”?  
In order to install/ re-install the driver, you must make the settings described in “Driver Signing  
Options”.  
(Windows XP ● p. 14, Windows 2000 ● p. 18)  
1 7 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
De le tin g th e d rive r  
If you were unable to install the driver according to the procedure given, the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 may  
not be recognized correctly by the computer. In this case, use the following procedure to delete the  
driver, and then follow the procedure in “Setup” (p. 13) to install the driver once again.  
Windows users  
Here's how to uninstall the dedicated driver.  
1 . Start up Windows with the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 disconnected.  
Disconnect all USB cables other than a USB keyboard or USB mouse.  
* If you are using Windows XP Professional/2000, log on as a user that has  
administrative privileges (e.g., Administrator).  
2 . Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
3 . From the Windows Start menu, choose "Run...".  
In the Run dialog box, input the following into the Open field, and click [OK].  
Windows XP/2000 users:  
D:\DRIVER\USB_XP2K\Uninstal.EXE  
Windows Me/98 users:  
D:\DRIVER\USB_ME98\Uninstal.EXE  
* The drive name D: may be different on your system. Use the drive name for your  
CD-ROM drive.  
4 . Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the driver.  
Macintosh users  
1 . Turn off the power of the PCR-30/ 50/ 80.  
Also disconnect the USB cable (by which the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is connected) from your  
Macintosh.  
2 . From the system extensions folder, drag “USB PCR” into the trash to delete it.  
3 . Delete PCR from the OMS Folder inside the System folder, or drag PCR Driver from the  
FreeMIDI Folder inside the System folder to the trash.  
4 . Restart the Macintosh.  
1 7 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MIDI im p le m e n ta tio n  
1. Receive data  
2. Transmit data  
●System exclusive messages  
● Channel voice messages  
In addition to the channel voice messages that can be transmitted in each mode, the  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80 lets you assign any channel voice message to any controller and  
transmit it.  
●Universal non-realtime system exclusive message  
●Identity request message  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
7EH, dev, 06H, 01H  
●Note off  
Status  
2nd byte  
kkH  
3rd byte  
00H  
Byte  
F0H  
7EH  
dev  
Explanation  
9nH  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Universal non-realtime system exclusive message)  
Device ID (10 or 7FH (Broadcast))  
Sub ID #1 (PCR-30/ 50/ 80)  
n = MIDI channel number:0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
kk = note number: 00H – 7FH (0 – 127)  
06H  
01H  
F7H  
Sub ID #1 (PCR-30/ 50/ 80)  
*
Transmitted when you release a key in Play mode.  
EOX (End of Exclusive)  
●Note on  
Status  
2nd byte  
kkH  
3rd byte  
vvH  
●Data transmission  
The PCR-30/ 50/ 80 can use Bulk Dump (p. 177) to transfer its internal memory set  
9nH  
data (p. 164).  
n = MIDI channel number:  
kk = note number:  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
00H – 7FH (0 – 127)  
01H – 7FH (1 – 127)  
●Data Set 1 (DT1)  
vv = note on velocity:  
These messages transmit the actual data, and are used to transfer data settings to a  
device.  
*
Transmitted when you push a key in Play mode.  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
●Polyphonic key pressure  
41H, 10H, 00H, 62H, 12H,  
aaH, ddH, ...eeH, sum  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
AnH  
kkH  
vvH  
Byte  
F0H  
41H  
10H  
00H  
62H  
12H  
aaH  
ddH  
:
Explanation  
n = MIDI channel number:  
kk = note number:  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
00H – 7FH (0 – 127)  
00H – 7FH (0 – 127)  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Roland)  
vv = key pressure:  
Device ID (For the PCR-30/ 50/ 80, fixed at 10H)  
Model ID #1 (PCR-30/ 50/ 80)  
Model ID #1 (PCR-30/ 50/ 80)  
Command ID (RQ1)  
●Control change  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
vvH  
Address  
BnH  
ccH  
Data  
n = MIDI channel number:  
cc = controller number:  
vv = control value:  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
00H – 77H  
:
00H – 7FH  
:
eeH  
sum  
F7H  
Data  
●Bank Select (Controller number 0, 32)  
Checksum  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
00H  
3rd byte  
mmH  
llH  
EOX (End of Exclusive)  
BnH  
20H  
*
The amount of data that can be transmitted at once is fixed for each type of data.  
Data that does not have the specified starting address and data size will not be  
received. Refer to the explanation in 3. Bulk Dump (p. 177).  
There must be an interval of at least 40 ms between each exclusive message that  
is sent.  
n = MIDI channel number:  
mm = Bank number MSB:  
ll = Bank number LSB:  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
00H – 7FH  
*
*
00H – 7FH  
Also, you must leave an interval of at least 500 ms after transmitting one set of  
bulk dump data.  
*
Transmitted in Bank mode.  
●Modulation (Controller number 1)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
01H  
3rd byte  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
vv = Modulation depth:00H – 7FH (0 – 127)  
*
Transmitted by upward/ downward operation of the BENDER lever in Play  
mode.  
1 7 4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
MIDI implementation  
●Program change  
● System common message  
On the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 you can assign the following system common messages to  
Status  
2nd byte  
CnH  
ppH  
any controller and transmit them.  
n = MIDI channel number:  
pp = Program number:  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
●MTC quarter frame  
00H – 7FH (prog. 1 – prog. 128)  
Status  
2nd byte  
F1H  
mmH  
*
Transmitted in Program change mode.  
mm = Message type/ value  
●Channel pressure  
Status  
2nd byte  
●Song position pointer  
DnH  
vvH  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
llH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
vv = Channel pressure:  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
00H – 7FH (0 – 127)  
F2H  
mmH  
mm, ll = Song position:  
00 00H - 7F 7FH (0-16383)  
●Pitch bend change  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
mmH  
●Song select  
EnH  
llH  
Status  
2nd byte  
F3H  
mmH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
mm, ll = Pitch Bend value:  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
00 00H – 40 00H – 7FH 7FH  
(-8192 – 0 – +8191)  
mm = Song number:  
00 00H - 7F 7FH (0-16383)  
*
Transmitted by rightward/ leftward operation of the BENDER lever in Play  
mode.  
●Tune request  
Status  
F6H  
● Channel mode messages  
In addition to the channel mode messages that can be transmitted in Panic mode,  
the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 lets you assign any channel voice message to any controller and  
transmit it.  
● System realtime message  
In addition to the Active Sensing messages that are transmitted constantly, the  
PCR-30/ 50/ 80 allows you to assign the following system realtime messages (other  
than Active Sensing) to any controller and transmit them.  
●Channel mode messages  
Status  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
●Start  
Status  
BnH  
ccH  
vvH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
cc = controller number:  
vv = control value:  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
78H – 7FH  
F8H  
00H – 7FH  
*
Transmitted if the System setting F8 CLOCK is ON.  
●All sounds off (Controller number 120)  
●Start  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
78H  
3rd byte  
00H  
Status  
FAH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
Transmitted in Panic mode.  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
●Continue  
Status  
*
FBH  
●Reset all controllers (Controller number 121)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
79H  
3rd byte  
00H  
●Stop  
Status  
FCH  
n = MIDI channel number:  
Transmitted in Panic mode.  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
●Active sensing  
Status  
*
FEH  
●All notes off (Controller number 123)  
Status  
BnH  
2nd byte  
7BH  
3rd byte  
00H  
*
*
Transmitted at intervals of approximately 250 ms.  
Cannot be assigned to a controller.  
n = MIDI channel number:  
Transmitted in Panic mode.  
0H – FH (Ch.1 – 16)  
●System reset  
Status  
*
FFH  
1 7 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MIDI implementation  
●Sender Model Name  
● System exclusive message  
The PCR-30/ 50/ 80 is able to transmit the following exclusive messages: exclusive  
messages assigned to the controllers, Identity Reply, V-LINK messages, and Bulk  
Dump.  
Transmitted when entering V-LINK mode.  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
41H,10H,00H,51H,12H,  
10H,71H,00H,45H,44H,49H,52H,4FH,4CH,  
20H,50H,43H,52H,00H,3BH  
●Universal non-realtime system exclusive  
●Identity reply  
Byte  
Explanation  
This message will be transmitted when an Identity Request message is received.  
F0H  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Roland)  
41H  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
10H  
Device ID (For the PCR-30/ 50/ 80, fixed at 10H)  
7EH,10H,06H,02H,41H,62H,01H,  
00H,00H,00H,01H,00H,00H  
00H 51H  
12H  
Model ID (V-LINK)  
Command ID (DT1)  
aaH  
Address  
Byte  
Explanation  
10H 71H 00H  
45H 44H 49H  
52H 4FH 4CH  
20H 50H 43H  
52H 00H  
3BH  
Data  
F0H  
Exclusive status  
Model name (EDIROL PCR)  
7EH  
ID number (Universal non-realtime message)  
Device ID (For the PCR-30/ 50/ 80, fixed at 10H)  
Sub ID #1 (General Information)  
Sub ID #1 (Identity Reply)  
ID number (Roland)  
:
10H  
:
06H  
:
02H  
Checksum  
41H  
F7H  
EOX (End of Exclusive)  
62H 01H  
00H 00H  
00H 01H  
00H 00H  
F7H  
Device family code  
Device family number code  
Software revision level  
●Data Set 1 DT1 (12H)  
Transmitted when you execute Bulk TX in the Bulk mode.  
:
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
EOX (End of Exclusive)  
41H, 10H, 00H, 62H, 12H,  
aaH, ddH, ...eeH, sum  
●V-LINK message  
●V-LINK ON  
Byte  
F0H  
41H  
10H  
00H  
62H  
12H  
aaH  
ddH  
:
Explanation  
Transmitted when entering V-LINK mode.  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Roland)  
Device ID  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
41H,10H,00H,51H,12H,  
10H,00H,00H,01H,0FH,0FH,51H  
Model ID #1 (PCR-30/ 50/ 80)  
Model ID #1 (PCR-30/ 50/ 80)  
Command ID (RQ1)  
Address  
Byte  
Explanation  
F0H  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Roland)  
Data  
41H  
10H  
Device ID (For the PCR-30/ 50/ 80, fixed at 10H)  
Model ID (V-LINK)  
:
00H 51H  
12H  
:
Command ID (DT1)  
eeH  
sum  
F7H  
Data  
10H 00H 00H  
01H  
Address  
Checksum  
V-LINK ON  
EOX (End of Exclusive)  
0FH  
Clip Control Rx. MIDI Ch. (16ch)  
Color Control Rx. MIDI Ch. (16ch)  
Checksum  
0FH  
*
The amount of data that can be transmitted at once is fixed for each type of data.  
Data that does not have the specified starting address and data size will not be  
received. Refer to the explanation in 3. Bulk Dump.  
51H  
F7H  
EOX (End of Exclusive)  
*
*
There must be an interval of at least 40 ms between each exclusive message that  
is sent.  
●V-LINK OFF  
Also, you must leave an interval of at least 500 ms after transmitting one set of  
bulk dump data.  
Transmitted when exiting V-LINK mode.  
Status  
F0H  
Data byte  
Status  
F7H  
41H,10H,00H,51H,12H,  
10H,00H,00H,00H,70H  
Byte  
Explanation  
F0H  
Exclusive status  
ID number (Roland)  
41H  
10H  
Device ID (For the PCR-30/ 50/ 80, fixed at 10H)  
Model ID (V-LINK)  
Command ID (DT1)  
Address  
00H 51H  
12H  
10H 00H 00H  
00H  
V-LINK OFF  
51H  
Checksum  
F7H  
EOX (End of Exclusive)  
1 7 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIDI implementation  
3. Bulk dump  
<Example1>  
Bulk dump allows a large amount of data to be transferred in a single operation.  
For example, this can be used to store all settings of a device into a computer or  
sequencer.  
What is the decimal expression of 5AH?  
From the preceding table, 5AH = 90.  
On the PCR-30/ 50/ 80, a bulk dump will be transmitted when you execute the Bulk  
mode operation BULK TX. The bulk dump is transmitted as several exclusive  
messages.  
<Example2>  
What is the decimal expression of the 7-bit hexadecimal value 12 34H?  
From the preceding table, 12H = 18, and 34H = 52.  
Thus, this is  
18 x 128 + 52 = 2356  
Address  
Parameter  
Packets  
27  
00H, 00H, 00H, 00H--00H, 00H, 1A, 7F  
Current memory  
<Example3>  
*
*
You must leave an interval of at least 40 ms between each exclusive message.  
What is the decimal expression of the nibble-expressed value 0A 03 09 0D?  
In the case of ALL BULK, the contents of memories 1--F will be transmitted as  
the current memory, consecutively from memory 1 through memory F. After  
transmitting one set of bulk dump data, you must leave an interval of at least  
500 ms.  
From the preceding table, 0AH = 10, 03H = 3, 09H = 9, and 0DH = 13.  
Thus, this is  
((10 x 16 + 3) x 16 + 9) x 16 + 13 = 41885  
<Example4> What is the nibble-expressed value of decimal 1258?  
1258 ÷ 16 = 78 (quotient) ... 10 (remainder)  
*
Please be aware that if you modify the data dumped from the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 by  
changing the order in which the exclusive messages are transmitted, by  
inserting other messages between the system exclusive messages, or by  
speeding up the timing of the transmission, the data may not be set correctly  
when the PCR-30/ 50/ 80 receives it.  
78 ÷ 16 = 4 (quotient) ... 14 (remainder)  
4 ÷ 16 = 0 (quotient) ... 4 (remainder)  
From the preceding table, 0 = 00H, 4 = 04H, 14 = 0EH, 10 = 0HA.  
Thus, the nibble-expressed value is  
00 04 0E 0AH  
4. Supplementary material  
●Example of an actual MIDI message  
<Example1> CE 04  
CnH is the Program Change status. “n” is the MIDI channel number. EH = 14, and  
04H = 04. Thus, this is a program change message on MIDI channel 15, for program  
number 05.  
●Decimal and Hexadecimal table  
(An “H” is appended to the end of numbers in hexadecimal notation.)  
In MIDI documentation, data values and addresses/ sizes of Exclusive messages,  
etc. are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits.  
The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers.  
fig.11-22e  
●Checksum calculation  
In order to verify that the message was received correctly, Roland exclusive  
messages (RQ1, DT1) add a checksum following the end of the data (before the F7).  
The checksum value is determined by the address and data (or size) of the  
exclusive message that is transmitted.  
Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex.  
0
1
00H  
01H  
02H  
03H  
04H  
05H  
06H  
07H  
08H  
09H  
0AH  
0BH  
0CH  
0DH  
0EH  
0FH  
10H  
11H  
12H  
13H  
14H  
15H  
16H  
17H  
18H  
19H  
1AH  
1BH  
1CH  
1DH  
1EH  
1FH  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
20H  
21H  
22H  
23H  
24H  
25H  
26H  
27H  
28H  
29H  
2AH  
2BH  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
40H  
41H  
42H  
43H  
44H 100  
45H 101  
46H 102  
47H 103  
48H 104  
49H 105  
4AH 106 6AH  
4BH 107 6BH  
4CH 108 6CH  
4DH 109 6DH  
4EH 110 6EH  
4FH 111 6FH  
50H 112  
51H 113  
52H 114  
53H 115  
54H 116  
55H 117  
56H 118  
57H 119  
58H 120  
59H 121  
96  
97  
98  
99  
60H  
61H  
62H  
63H  
64H  
65H  
66H  
67H  
68H  
69H  
2
●Calculating the checksum  
3
4
(“H” has been added following hexadecimal values)  
The checksum is a value that results in a lower 7 bits of 0 when the address, size,  
and checksum itself are added together.  
5
6
7
8
9
Specifically, the calculation will be as follows when the exclusive message you  
want to transmit has an address of aa bb ccH and data or size of dd ee ffH.  
aa + bb + cc + dd + ee + ff = total  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
44 2CH  
45 2DH  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
2EH  
2FH  
30H  
31H  
32H  
33H  
34H  
35H  
36H  
37H  
38H  
39H  
3AH  
3BH  
total ÷ 128 = quotient ... remainder  
70H  
71H  
72H  
73H  
74H  
75H  
76H  
77H  
78H  
79H  
128 - remainder = checksum  
*
However, as an exception, the checksum for a remainder of 0 is not 80H but  
rather 00H.  
5AH 122 7AH  
5BH 123 7BH  
5CH 124 7CH  
5DH 125 7DH  
5EH 126 7EH  
5FH 127 7FH  
60 3CH  
61 3DH  
62  
63  
3EH  
3FH  
*
*
The decimal expression of the MIDI channel, program change, etc., is one  
greater than the decimal value shown in the table above.  
The hexadecimal expression for each 7 bits allows a maximum of 128 steps (0--  
127) to be expressed by one byte of data. Multiple bytes are used if the data  
requires greater resolution than this. For example, a value expressed by two 7-  
bit bytes “aa” and “bbH” would be aa x 128 + bb.  
*
*
In the case of signed (+/ -) data, 00H = -64, 40H = +/ -0, and 7FH = +63; i.e., a  
value 64 less than the decimal value shown in the above table is used. In the case  
of a two-byte value, 00 00H = -8192, 40 00 = +/ -0, and 7F 7F = +8191. For  
example, a value of “aa” and “bbH” would have a decimal expression of aa bbH  
- 40 00H = aa x 128 + bb - 64 x 128.  
In the case of data indicated as “use nibble data,” hexadecimal expression in 4-  
bit units is used. A nibble-expressed value of the two bytes 0a and 0bH would  
have a value of a x 16 + b.  
1 7 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIDI implementation  
MIDI KEYBOARD CONTROLLER  
Date : Nov. 1, 2002  
Version : 1.00  
Model PCR-30/50/80  
MIDI Implementation Chart  
Function...  
Transmitted  
Recognized  
Remarks  
Basic  
Channel Changed  
Default  
1
1–16  
X
X
Default  
Messages  
Altered  
Mode 3  
OMNI ON/OFF, MONO, POLY  
X
X
X
Mode  
**************  
Note  
Number :  
X
X
0–127  
**************  
True Voice  
Note On  
Note Off  
O (9n v=1–127)  
O (9n v=0)  
X
X
Velocity  
After  
Touch  
Key's  
Channel's  
O
O
X
X
Pitch Bend  
O
O
X
X
0-119  
Control  
Change  
Program  
Change  
O (0–127)  
**************  
X
X
: True Number  
System Exclusive  
O
O
: Song Position  
: Song Select  
: Tune Request  
O
X
X
X
System  
Common  
O (0–127)  
O
System  
Real Time : Commands  
: Clock  
O
O
X
X
O *1 (120)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
: All Sound Off  
O *1 (121)  
: Reset All Controllers  
Aux  
Messages  
O
: Local On/Off  
: All Notes Off  
: Active Sensing  
: System Reset  
O *1 (123)  
O
O
Notes  
* 1 When PANIC is transmitted.  
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY  
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY  
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO  
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO  
O : Yes  
X : No  
1 7 8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ma in sp e cifica tio n s  
● PCR-30/50/80: MIDI KEYBOARD CONTROLLER  
● Keyboard  
● Power Supply  
PCR-30: 32 Keys (with velocity)  
PCR-50: 49 Keys (with velocity)  
PCR-80: 61 Keys (with velocity)  
DC 9 V (AC Adaptor) or USB Bus Powered  
● Current Draw  
300 mA (AC Adaptor)  
300 mA (USB Bus Power)  
● Controller  
Memory Button  
● Dimensions  
MIDI Channel Button  
Program Change Button  
Edit Button  
PCR-30:  
600 (W) x 232 (D) x 86.4 (H) mm  
23-5/ 8 (W) x 9-3/ 16 (D) x 3-7/ 16 (H) inches  
V-LINK Button  
Octave Shift Button (+/ -)  
Transpose Button  
PCR-50:  
833 (W) x 232 (D) x 86.4 (H) mm  
32-13/ 16 (W) x 9-3/ 16 (D) x 3-7/ 16 (H) inches  
Assignable Button (B1--6, L1--3)  
Bender/ Modulation Lever  
Assignable Rotary Volume (R1--8)  
Assignable Slider (S1--8)  
Assignable Pedal (P1--2)  
PCR-80:  
1,000(W) x 232(D) x 86.4 (H) mm  
39-3/ 8(W) x 9-3/ 16 (D) x 3-7/ 16 (H) inches  
● Weight  
● Display  
PCR-30: 2.4 kg / 5 lbs 5 oz (excluding AC adaptor)  
PCR-50: 3.3 kg / 7 lbs 5 oz (excluding AC adaptor)  
PCR-80: 3.7 kg / 8 lbs 3 oz (excluding AC adaptor)  
7 segments, 3 characters (LED)  
Power Indicator  
● Rear Panel  
● Accessories  
AC Adaptor (ACP Series)  
CD-ROM  
Power Switch (USB BUS/ OFF/ DC IN)  
● Connectors  
Hold Pedal Jack  
Expression Pedal Jack  
MIDI Jacks (IN/ OUT)  
USB Jack  
USB Cable  
Owner's Manual  
Template Sheets (GM2/ BLANK)  
● Options  
DC IN Jack  
Pedal Switch: DP Series  
Expression Pedal: EV Series  
* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to  
change without prior notice.  
1 7 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IN DEX  
Device Manager ............................................... 172  
Display ................................................................ 11  
Dispositivo predeterminado .......................... 103  
Dispositivo preferido ...................................... 103  
Driver .................................................................. 13  
Driver Signing Options ............................... 14, 18  
A
AC adaptor ........................................................... 9  
AC adaptor jack ................................................. 12  
AFTERTOUCH ASSIGN ................................ 129  
ALL BULK ................................................ 151, 153  
AppleTalk ........................................................... 27  
ASSIGN COPY ................................................. 147  
E
EDIT ................................................................... 125  
B
BANK ................................................................ 120  
EDIT Button ........................................................ 10  
Edit mode ......................................................... 125  
ENTER Button .................................................... 11  
Error ................................................................... 152  
EXPRESSION ..................................................... 12  
Bank mode ........................................................ 120  
Bank select ........................................................ 120  
Bend Pitch Control .......................................... 144  
BENDER Lever ................................................... 11  
Bevorzugtes Gerät ............................................. 44  
Block .................................................................. 162  
BULK ................................................................. 151  
Bus ........................................................................ 12  
Button mode ..................................................... 158  
F
F8 CLOCK DEFAULT TEMPO ..................... 154  
F8 CLOCK ON/ OFF ....................................... 154  
F8 CLOCK PORT SET ..................................... 154  
FACTORY RESET ............................................ 154  
Find new hardware wizard ........................... 171  
FreeMIDI ............................................................. 29  
C
Channel ............................................................. 162  
Channel Pressure ............................................. 129  
checksum ........................................................... 160  
CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN ..................... 132  
Controller .............................................. 11–12, 126  
Controllers .......................................................... 10  
Copy ................................................................... 126  
Cubase ............................................................... 166  
Current channel ................................................. 10  
G
Generic driver .................................................. 156  
GM2 System On ............................................... 142  
GS ............................................................... 167–168  
H
H-ACTIVITY ON/ OFF ................................... 154  
HEX ............................................................. 11, 158  
HEX Button ......................................................... 10  
Hexadecimal ..................................................... 158  
HOLD .................................................................. 12  
D
DATA OUT ......................................................... 11  
Data Set 1 .................................................. 174, 176  
DC ........................................................................ 12  
DEC Button ......................................................... 10  
DECIMAL ......................................................... 158  
Decimal .............................................................. 158  
DECIMAL Button .............................................. 11  
Default device .................................................... 23  
Deleting the driver ........................................... 173  
I
INC Button ......................................................... 10  
Input mode ....................................................... 158  
K
KEYBOARD PORT SET .................................. 154  
L
Latch mode ....................................................... 158  
1 8 0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
LSB ..................................................................... 120  
Polyphonic Key Pressure ................................ 129  
Port .................................................................... 159  
Power Indicator ................................................. 10  
Power switch ...................................................... 12  
Preferred device ................................................. 23  
PROGRAM CHANGE ............................ 119, 158  
PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN .................... 135  
PROGRAM CHANGE Button ......................... 10  
Program Change mode ................................... 119  
PROTECT .......................................................... 150  
M
Master Volume ................................................. 143  
MCR-8 ........................................................ 165–166  
MEMORY .......................................................... 121  
MEMORY Button ............................................... 10  
Memory mode .................................................. 121  
MIDI ................................................................... 114  
MIDI CH ................................................... 118, 158  
MIDI CH Button ................................................ 10  
MIDI Channel mode ........................................ 118  
MIDI IN ............................................................. 159  
MIDI IN/ OUT connectors ................................ 12  
MIDI OUT ......................................................... 159  
MIDI output ........................................................ 24  
MIDI-Ausgabe .................................................... 45  
MSB .................................................................... 120  
R
Receive mode ................................................... 151  
RPN/ NRPN ASSIGN ..................................... 138  
S
Salida de MIDI ................................................. 104  
SAVE ................................................................. 148  
Security Slot ........................................................ 12  
SINGLE BULK ......................................... 151, 153  
SNAPSHOT ...................................................... 122  
Snapshot mode ................................................. 122  
SONAR .............................................................. 165  
Sortie MIDI ......................................................... 65  
Standardgerät ..................................................... 44  
STARTUP MEMORY ...................................... 154  
SYS EX. ASSIGN .............................................. 140  
Sys Ex. ASSIGN ............................................... 160  
SYSTEM ............................................................ 154  
System exclusive message .............................. 140  
System exclusive messages ............................ 174  
N
NO ASSIGN ...................................................... 146  
NOTE ASSIGN ................................................. 127  
O
OCTAVE ............................................................. 11  
OMNI ................................................................. 149  
OMS ..................................................................... 26  
Opciones de firma del controlador ........... 94, 98  
Options de signature du pilote .................. 55, 59  
Opzioni firma driver ................................... 74, 78  
Original driver ................................................. 156  
P
T
PANIC ............................................................... 123  
Template sheets ................................................... 9  
Panic mode ....................................................... 123  
PCR .................................................................... 159  
PCR MIDI IN .................................................... 159  
PCR MIDI OUT ................................................ 159  
PCR1 .................................................................. 159  
PCR2 .................................................................. 159  
Periferica predefinita ......................................... 83  
Periferica preferenziale ..................................... 83  
Périphérique par défaut .................................... 64  
PLAY mode ...................................................... 116  
Toggle mode ..................................................... 158  
Transmit mode ................................................. 153  
TRANSPOSE ...................................................... 11  
TRANSPOSE/ ENTER Button ......................... 11  
Treibersignaturoptionen ............................. 34, 38  
U
Unknown driver found .................................. 172  
USB .............................................................. 11, 115  
USB cable .............................................................. 9  
1 8 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
USB connector .................................................... 12  
USB DRIVER MODE ....................................... 154  
Uscita MIDI ......................................................... 84  
V
VELOCITY OFFSET ........................................ 154  
V-LINK ................................................................ 10  
V-LINK Button ................................................... 10  
V-LINK mode ..................................................... 10  
X
XG ...................................................................... 169  
1 8 2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information  
When you need repair service, call your nearest EDIROL/Roland Service Center or authorized  
EDIROL/Roland distributor in your country as shown below.  
IRELAND  
HONG KONG  
BARBADOS  
PERU  
CYPRUS  
Roland Ireland  
Parsons Music Ltd.  
A&B Music Supplies LTD  
12 Webster Industrial Park  
Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados  
TEL: (246)430-1100  
Audionet  
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.  
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,  
CYPRUS  
G2 Calmount Park, Calmount  
Avenue, Dublin 12  
Republic of IRELAND  
TEL: (01) 4294444  
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39  
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,  
Kowloon, HONG KONG  
TEL: 2333 1863  
Distribuciones Musicales SAC  
Juan Fanning 530  
Miraflores  
Lima - Peru  
TEL: (511) 4461388  
EUROPE  
EDIROL (Europe) Ltd.  
Studio 3.4 114 Power Road  
London W4 5PY  
TEL: (022) 66-9426  
IRAN  
MOCO INC.  
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,  
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad  
Tehran, IRAN  
BRAZIL  
Roland Brasil Ltda.  
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B  
Parque Industrial San Jose  
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL  
TEL: (011) 4615 5666  
ITALY  
Roland Italy S. p. A.  
Viale delle Industrie 8,  
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY  
TEL: (02) 937-78300  
U. K.  
INDIA  
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.  
409, Nirman Kendra  
Mahalaxmi Flats Compound  
Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road,  
Mumbai-400011, INDIA  
TEL: (022) 2493 9051  
TEL: +44 (0)20 8747 5949  
FAX:+44 (0)20 8747 5948  
http://www.edirol.com/europe  
TRINIDAD  
AMR Ltd  
Ground Floor  
Maritime Plaza  
Barataria Trinidad W.I.  
TEL: (868)638 6385  
TEL: (021) 285-4169  
Deutschland  
TEL: 0700 33 47 65 20  
France  
TEL: 0810 000 371  
Italia  
TEL: 02 93778329  
ISRAEL  
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons  
Ltd.  
8 Retzif Ha’aliya Hashnya St.  
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL  
TEL: (03) 6823666  
NORWAY  
Roland Scandinavia Avd.  
Kontor Norge  
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95  
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo  
NORWAY  
CHILE  
Comercial Fancy II S.A.  
Rut.: 96.919.420-1  
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor  
Santiago - Centro, CHILE  
TEL: (02) 688-9540  
INDONESIA  
PT Citra IntiRama  
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150  
Jakarta Pusat  
INDONESIA  
TEL: (021) 6324170  
URUGUAY  
Todo Musica S.A.  
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771  
C.P.: 11.800  
Montevideo, URUGUAY  
TEL: (02) 924-2335  
TEL: 2273 0074  
JORDAN  
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.  
FREDDY FOR MUSIC  
P. O. Box 922846  
Amman 11192 JORDAN  
TEL: (06) 5692696  
COLOMBIA  
Centro Musical Ltda.  
POLAND  
MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O.  
UL. Gibraltarska 4.  
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND  
TEL: (022) 679 44 19  
KOREA  
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 VENEZUELA  
Cosmos Corporation  
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,  
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA  
TEL: (02) 3486-8855  
Medellin, Colombia  
TEL: (574)3812529  
Instrumentos Musicales  
Allegro,C.A.  
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar  
import  
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo  
Caracas, Venezuela  
TEL: (212) 244-1122  
NORTH AMERICA  
CURACAO  
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.  
Orionweg 30  
Curacao, Netherland Antilles  
TEL:(305)5926866  
CANADA  
Roland Canada Music Ltd.  
(Head Office)  
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond  
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA  
TEL: (604) 270 6626  
KUWAIT  
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI  
& SONS CO.  
Abdullah Salem Street,  
Safat, KUWAIT  
TEL: 243-6399  
PORTUGAL  
Roland Iberia, S.L.  
Portugal Office  
Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto  
4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL  
TEL: 22 608 00 60  
MALAYSIA/  
SINGAPORE  
Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.  
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,  
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling  
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA  
TEL: (03) 7805-3263  
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC  
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez  
Calle Proyecto Central No.3  
Ens.La Esperilla  
Santo Domingo,  
Dominican Republic  
TEL:(809) 683 0305  
Roland Canada Music Ltd.  
(Toronto Office)  
170 Admiral Boulevard  
Mississauga On L5T 2N6  
CANADA  
EUROPE  
LEBANON  
Chahine S.A.L.  
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine  
Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-  
5857  
Beirut, LEBANON  
TEL: (01) 20-1441  
ROMANIA  
FBS LINES  
Piata Libertatii 1,  
535500 Gheorgheni,  
ROMANIA  
AUSTRIA  
PHILIPPINES  
Roland Elektronische  
Musikinstrumente HmbH.  
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.  
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue  
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,  
PHILIPPINES  
TEL: (905) 362 9707  
TEL: (266) 364 609  
Austrian Office  
ECUADOR  
Mas Musika  
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma  
Guayaquil - Ecuador  
Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8,  
A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA  
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260  
U. S. A.  
RUSSIA  
MuTek  
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6  
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA  
TEL: (095) 981-4967  
Roland Corporation U.S.  
5100 S. Eastern Avenue  
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,  
U. S. A.  
TEL: (02) 899 9801  
OMAN  
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.  
Malatan House No.1  
Al Noor Street, Ruwi  
SULTANATE OF OMAN  
TEL: 2478 3443  
TAIWAN  
BELGIUM/FRANCE/  
HOLLAND/  
LUXEMBOURG  
Roland Central Europe N.V.  
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel  
(Westerlo) BELGIUM  
TEL:(593-4)2302364  
ROLAND TAIWAN  
TEL: (323) 890 3700  
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.  
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung  
Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei,  
TAIWAN, R.O.C.  
GUATEMALA  
SPAIN  
Roland Iberia, S.L.  
Paseo García Faria, 33-35  
08005 Barcelona SPAIN  
TEL: 93 493 91 00  
Casa Instrumental  
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11  
Ciudad de Guatemala  
Guatemala  
QATAR  
Badie Studio & Stores  
P.O. Box 62,  
Doha, QATAR  
TEL: 423554  
AFRICA  
EGYPT  
Al Fanny Trading Office  
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany  
Street,  
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,  
Cairo 11341, EGYPT  
TEL: 20-2-417-1828  
TEL: (02) 2561 3339  
TEL: (014) 575811  
TEL:(502) 599-2888  
THAILAND  
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.  
330 Soi Verng NakornKasem,  
New Road, Sumpantawongse,  
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND  
TEL: (02) 224-8821  
CZECH REP.  
K-AUDIO  
Kardasovska 626.  
CZ-198 00 Praha 9,  
CZECH REP.  
SWEDEN  
HONDURAS  
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.  
BO.Paz Barahona  
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O  
San Pedro Sula, Honduras  
TEL: (504) 553-2029  
Roland Scandinavia A/S  
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE  
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.  
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN  
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20  
SAUDI ARABIA  
aDawliah Universal  
Electronics APL  
Corniche Road, Aldossary  
Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar,  
SAUDI ARABIA  
TEL: (2) 666 10529  
VIETNAM  
SAIGON MUSIC  
DISTRIBUTOR  
(TAN DINH MUSIC)  
138 Tran Quang Khai Street  
Dist. 1, Ho Chi Minh City  
VIETNAM  
REUNION  
DENMARK  
SWITZERLAND  
Roland (Switzerland) AG  
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,  
CH-4452 Itingen,  
SWITZERLAND  
TEL: (061) 927-8383  
MARTINIQUE  
Musique & Son  
Z.I.Les Mangle  
97232 Le Lamantin  
Martinique F.W.I.  
TEL: 596 596 426860  
Maison FO - YAM Marcel  
25 Rue Jules Hermann,  
Chaudron - BP79 97 491  
Ste Clotilde Cedex,  
Roland Scandinavia A/S  
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,  
DK-2100 Copenhagen  
DENMARK  
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952  
SAUDI ARABIA  
TEL: (03) 898 2081  
REUNION ISLAND  
TEL: (0262) 218-429  
TEL: 3916 6200  
SYRIA  
Technical Light & Sound  
Center  
Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St.  
Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520,  
Damascus, SYRIA  
TEL: (08) 848-4068  
FINLAND  
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial  
Finland  
Elannontie 5  
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND  
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020  
UKRAINE  
TIC-TAC  
Mira Str. 19/108  
P.O. Box 180  
295400 Munkachevo,  
UKRAINE  
TEL: (03131) 414-40  
SOUTH AFRICA  
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.  
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24  
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800  
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA  
Gigamusic SARL  
10 Rte De La Folie  
97200 Fort De France  
Martinique F.W.I.  
TEL: 596 596 715222  
AUSTRALIA/  
NEW ZEALAND  
TEL: (011) 223-5384  
TEL: (021) 799 4900  
MEXICO  
TURKEY  
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.  
Galip Dede Cad. No.37  
Beyoglu - Istanbul / TURKEY  
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10  
AUSTRALIA/  
GERMANY  
Roland Elektronische  
Musikinstrumente HmbH.  
Oststrasse 96, 22844  
Norderstedt, GERMANY  
TEL: (040) 52 60090  
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.  
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar  
de los Padres 01780 Mexico  
D.F. MEXICO  
UNITED KINGDOM  
NEW ZEALAND  
Roland Corporation  
Australia Pty.,Ltd.  
38 Campbell Avenue  
Dee Why West. NSW 2099  
AUSTRALIA  
ASIA  
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.  
Atlantic Close, Swansea  
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA  
SA7 9FJ,  
CHINA  
TEL: (55) 5668-6699  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
U.A.E.  
Zak Electronics & Musical  
Instruments Co. L.L.C.  
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,  
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai,  
U.A.E.  
UNITED KINGDOM  
TEL: (01792) 702701  
NICARAGUA  
Bansbach Instrumentos  
Musicales Nicaragua  
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal  
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida  
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503  
Managua, Nicaragua  
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road  
Shanghai 200090, CHINA  
TEL: (021) 5580-0800  
GREECE  
STOLLAS S.A.  
Music Sound Light  
155, New National Road  
Patras 26442, GREECE  
TEL: 2610 435400  
For Australia  
Tel: (02) 9982 8266  
For New Zealand  
Tel: (09) 3098 715  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
(BEIJING OFFICE)  
10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili  
Chaoyang District Beijing  
100011 CHINA  
MIDDLE EAST  
TEL: (04) 3360715  
BAHRAIN  
Moon Stores  
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,  
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,  
State of BAHRAIN  
TEL: (505)277-2557  
HUNGARY  
CENTRAL/LATIN  
AMERICA  
Roland East Europe Ltd.  
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83  
H-2046 Torokbalint,  
HUNGARY  
TEL: (010) 6426-5050  
TEL: 17 211 005  
Roland Shanghai Electronics  
Co.,Ltd.  
ARGENTINA  
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.  
Av.Santa Fe 2055  
TEL: (23) 511011  
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE)  
2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie  
Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng,  
Guangzhou 510600, CHINA  
TEL: (020) 8736-0428  
(1123) Buenos Aires  
ARGENTINA  
TEL: (011) 4508-2700  
As of December 10, 2005 (EDIROL-1)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Q See Cordless Telephone QSMCC User Guide
Radica Games Video Game Console 71023 User Guide
Raypak Water Heater WH 135 User Guide
RCA Camcorder PRO807 User Guide
RCA Home Theater System RTD316W User Guide
Roland Universal Remote GR 33 User Guide
Rosewill Server RSV L4411 User Guide
Russell Hobbs Microwave Oven RHM2018 User Guide
Samsung DVD Player DVD V6500 User Guide
Sanyo Air Conditioner CH2422 User Guide